Fire Station 93 Bunker Room Renovations FinalVILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
1. Invitation for Bidder's Proposals
2. General Instructions to Bidders
3. Bidder's Proposal
4. Bidder's Sworn Acknowledgement
5. Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement
6. Notice of Award
7. Contract
Contractor' s Certifi cation
Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms
Attachment B : Specifications
Attachment C: List of Drawings
Attachment D: Special Project Requirements
Appendix 1: Prevailing Wages
Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond
Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
INVITATION FOR BIDDER'S PROPOSALS
OWNER: Village of Oak Brook
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
1. Invitation to Bid
Owner invites sealed Bidder's Proposals for the Work described in detail in the Contract
and generally described as follows:
Renovation of the existing bunk room, and removal and replacement of existing
flooring materials in bunk room and in adjacent areas as indicated in the drawings
and described herein. The general contractor shall provide and install all
materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes, but not necessarily
limited to, general interior demolition, new gypsum board partition walls, wood
trim, new electrical receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing electrical
can lights, plastic wall covering, carpet replacement, new rubber flooring, new
fumiture and painting.
The Work shall be performed at the following Work Site:
Oak Brook Fire Station 93,725 Enterprise Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
2. The Bid Packaee
The Bid Package consists of the following documents, all of which are by this reference
made apart of this Invitation for Bidder's Proposals as though fully set forth herein:
A. Invitation for Bidder's Proposals;
B. General lnstructions to Bidders;
C. Addenda. if any are issued during the bidding process;
D. Bidder's Proposal;
E. Bidder'sSwornAcknowledgement;
-1-
INVITATION
Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement;
Other information submitted by Bidder, if requested during the bidding process;
Notice of Award; and
I. Contract, including all of its attachments and appendices, if any.
4. Inspection and Examination
Bid Documents may be obtained in two ways:
1. Via the Internet at www.oak-brook.org, at no charge.
2. A paper hard copy may be obtained in person from Owner's Purchasing Division,
Butler Government Center, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523.
The Bid Package may be examined at the office of Owner as listed above. In making
copies of the Bid Package available to prospective Bidders, Owner does so only for the purpose
of obtaining Bidder's Proposals and such provision does not confer a license or grant for any
other use.
Each prospective Bidder shall, before submitting its Bidder's Proposal, carefully examine
the Bid Package. Each prospective Bidder shall inspect in detail the Work Site and the
surrounding arca and shall familiarize itself with all local conditions, including subsurface,
underground and other concealed conditions, affecting the Contract, the Work and the Work Site.
The Bidder whose Bidder's Proposal is accepted will be responsible for all errors in its Bidder's
Proposal including those resulting from its failure or neglect to make a thorough examination and
investigation of the Bid Package and the conditions of the Work Site and the surrounding area.
The Contract specifications may include the Illinois Department of Transportation's
General Conditions of the Contract, "State of Illinois Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction" (SSRB); "Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction
in Illinois" (SSWS); "llinois Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and
Highways" (MUTCD). The specifications also may include Owners' Village Code and Building
Code. References to any of these manuals, codes, and specifications means the latest editions
effective on the date of the bid opening.
5. Pre-Bid Meeting
Every prospective bidder is required to attend a Pre-bid Meeting and Walk-Thru
scheduled for 10:00 A.M., Wednesday March 9,2016 at the Oak Brook Fire Station 93,725
Enterprise Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523, to review the scope of the improvements and the
project specifications. Failure to attend this mandatory meeting will disqualify the bidder.
F.
G.
H.
1
TNVITATION
6. Bid Openine
Owner will receive sealed Bidder's Proposals for the Work until 10:00 a.m., local time,
Wednesday, March 16,2016, in the Samuel E. Dean Board Room, at the Butler Government
Center located at 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523, at which time, or as soon
thereafter as possible, all Bidder's Proposais will be publicly opened and read aloud. Bidders or
their agents are invited to be present.
7. Bid Securitv. Bonds and Insurance
A. Bid Security. Each Bidder's Proposal shall be accompanied by a security deposit
of at least 5 percent of the Bidder's Price Proposal in the form of (1) a Cashier's Check or
Certified Check drawn on a solvent bank insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation
and payable without condition to Owner or (2) a Bid Bond in a form satisfactory to Owner from
a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with a general rating of A minus
and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's Insurance Guide.
B. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder will be required to
furnish a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond on award of the Contract,
each in the penal sum of the full amount of the Contract Price, on forms provided by, or
otherwise acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company meeting the requirements set forth
above. Each Bidder's Proposal must be accompanied by a letter from such a surety company
stating that it will execute Bonds on forms provided by, or otherwise acceptable to, Owner, on
award of the Contract to Bidder.
C. Insurance. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish certificates of
insurance as required by Section 4.2 of the Contract on award of the Contract. Each Bidder's
Proposal must be accompanied by a letter from Bidder's insurance carrier or its agent certifying
that said insurer has read the requirements set forth in the Contract and will issue the required
certificates and policies of insurance on award of the Contract to Bidder.
DATED: March 2,2016
Village of Oak Brook
Charlotte K. Pruss
Village Clerk
-J-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
-1-
1.
2.
a
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Interpretation of Documents Included in Bid Package
A. Defined Terms. A1l terms capitalized in these General Instructions to Bidders and
in the other documents included in the Bid Package are defined in the documents included in the
Bid Package and shall have such defined meanings wherever used.
B. Implied Terms. If any personnel, equipment, materials, or supplies that are not
directly or indirectly set forth in the Contract are nevertheless necessary to the proper provision,
performance, and completion of the whole of the Work in accordance with the intent of the
Contract, each prospective Bidder shall understand such personnel, equipment, materials, or
supplies to be implied and shall provide for such personnel, equipment, materials, or supplies in
its Bidder's Proposal as fully as if it were particularly described.
C. Information Provided by Owner. When information pertaining to subsurface,
underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility locations or
conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other preliminary
investigations is distributed with the Bid Package, or such information is otherwise made
available to any prospective Bidder by Owner, such information is distributed or made available
solely for the convenience of such prospective Bidder and is not part of the Bid Package. Owner
assumes no responsibility whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of any such
information, and there is no guaranty or wiuranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions
indicated are representative of those existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the
conditions indicated are representative of those existing at any particular location, or that
unanticipated conditions may not be present.
D. Addenda. No interpretation of the documents included within the Bid Package
will be made except by written addendum duly issued by Owner ("Addendum"). No
interpretation not contained in an Addendum shall be valid or have any force or effect whatever,
nor entitle any Bidder to assert any claim or demand against Owner on account thereof.
All Addenda issued prior to the opening of Bidder's Proposals shall become a part of the Bid
Package. Each prospective Bidder shall be responsible for inquiring from time to time as to the
availability of Addenda.
-1-
INSTRUCTIONS
If any prospective Bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Bid Package, such
prospective Bidder shall submit to Owner a written request for an interpretation thereof as far in
advance of the scheduled opening of Bidder's Proposals as possible.
Owner shall use its best efforts to issue Addenda in response to all valid, appropriate, and timely
inquiries, but accepts no responsibility for doing so. Inquiries not answered by Addenda shall be
considered invalid, inappropriate, or untimely inquiries.
2. Calculation of Unit Price Proposals
On all items for which Bidder's Proposals are to be received on a unit price basis, the
approximate quantities stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only for Owner's
convenience in comparing Bidder's Proposals and shall not be relied on by Prospective Bidders.
Each prospective Bidder shall, before submitting its Bidder's Proposal, make its own estimate of
the quantities of Unit Price Items required to complete the Work.
3. Prevailing Wages
In accordance with the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq., not less than the
prevailing rate of wages for similar work in the locality in which the Work is to be performed
shall be paid to all laborers. Specific provisions relating to the Prevailing Wage Act, and
required of the Contractor, are included in the Contract. A copy of Owner's ordinance
ascertaining the prevailing rate of wages in effect as of the date of the Invitation for Bidder's
Proposals, is included in the Bid Package. If the Illinois Department of Labor revises the
prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised rate shall apply to the Contract.
4. Taxes and Benefits
Owner is exempt from state and local sales, use, and excise taxes. Bidder's Price
Proposal shall not include any such taxes. A letter of exemption will be provided to the
successful Bidder, if necessary. Owner will not reimburse, nor assist the successful Bidder in
obtaining reimbursement for, any state or local sales, use or excise taxes paid by the successful
Bidder.
Bidder's Price Proposal shall include all other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of
every kind or nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for
unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities or other similar
benefits.
5. Permits and Licenses
Except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contract, Bidder's Price
Proposal shall include the cost of obtaining all permits, licenses, and other approvals and
authorizations required by law for performance of the Work. It shall be the sole responsibility of
each prospective Bidder to determine the applicable permits, licenses, and other approvals and
_)_
INSTRUCTIONS
authorizations and no extra compensation shall be paid by Owner for the successful Bidder's
failure to include these costs in its Bidder's Proposal.
6. Preparation of Bidder's Proposal
Bidder's Proposals to enter into the Contract for the Work shall be made only on the
blank Bidder's Proposal form furnished by Owner and included in the Bid Package.
The Village requests that proposals are written legibly in ink. In case of any conflict
between words and numbers, words shall prevail. In case of any error in adding or multiplying
individual items, the prices listed for individual items shall control over any incorrect total of
such items. A Bidder's Proposal may be rejected if it does not contain a requested price for each
and every item named in the Bidder's Proposal form or may be interpreted as bidding "no
charge" to Owner for any item left blank.
Prospective Bidders are wamed against making alterations of any kind to the Bidder's
Proposal form or to any entry thereon. Bidder's Proposals that contain omissions, conditions,
alterations, or additions not called for may be rejected or interpreted so as to be most favorable to
Owner.
Each Bidder shall securely staple into its Bidder's Proposal a copy of each Addendum
issued and shall include in the place provided therefor in the Bidder's Proposal form a listing of
all such Addenda.
Each Bidder shall complete and securely staple into its Bidder's Proposal the Bidder's
Sworn Acknowledgement and the Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement included in the Bid
Package, and shall staple into its Bidder's Proposal the Bid Security and the surety and insurance
commitment letters as specified in the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals.
Every Bidder submitting a Bidder's Proposal shall be conclusively deemed to have
evidenced an intention to be bound thereby whether or not the requirements for signing Bidder's
Proposals found in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders are satisfied. However,
any Bidder's Proposal that fails to comply with Section 7 of these General Instructions to
Bidders may nevertheless be rejected.
Bidder's Proposals that are not submitted on the Bidder's Proposal form fumished by
Owner or that are not prepared in accordance with these General Instructions to Bidders may be
rejected. If a deficiently prepared Bidder's Proposal is not rejected, Owner may demand
correction of any deficiency and award the Contract to Bidder on satisfactory compliance with
these General Instructions to Bidders.
7. SignatureRequirements
A. Bidder's Proposals. The following requirements shall be observed in the signing
of each Bidder's Proposal:
-3-
INSTRUCTIONS
(1) Corporations. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a corporation shall be
signed by the President or other authorized officer of the corporation and
shall also bear the attesting signature of the Secretary or Assistant
Secretary of the corporation.
(2) Partnerships. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a partnership shall be
signed by all of its general partners or by an attorney-in-fact.
(3) Individuals. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by an individual shall be
signed by such individual or by an attomey-in-fact.
(4) Joint Ventures. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a joint venture shall
be signed by each signatory of the joint venture agreement by which such
joint venture was formed in accordance with the applicable provisions of
(1), (2), and (3) above or by an attorney-in-fact.
When requested by Owner, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the person or persons
signing on behalf of Bidder shall be furnished.
B. Other Documents. The signature requirements set forth in Subsection 7,{ shall
apply to all other documents in the Bid Package required to be executed by Bidder, Bidder's
sureties and Bidder's insurance representatives as well as to the Contract, the Contractor's
Certification, and all other required documentation related to the Contract.
8. Bid Securitv
A. Required Bid Securiq,. Every Bidder's Proposal shall be accompanied by bid
security in the form of a Cashier's Check, Certified Check or Bid Bond as specified in the
Invitation for Bidder's Proposals (*Bid Security"), which Bid Security shall stand as a guaranty
that (i) Bidder will submit all additional information requested by Owner; (2) if such Bidder's
Proposal is accepted, Bidder will timely file the Bonds and the certificates and policies of
insurance required by the Contract; and (3) if such Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will
timely execute the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required documentation
related to the Contract.
B. Return of Bid Securitv. Bid Security submitted in the form of Cashier's Checks
or Certified Checks will be retumed within five days after execution of the Contract by Owner.
Bid Bonds will not be retumed unless otherwise requested by Bidder.
C. Liquidated Damages. If a Bidder fails to timely submit all additional information
requested by Owner, or if the successful Bidder fails to timely and properly submit all required
Bonds, certificates and policies of insurance, or if the successful Bidder fails to timely and
properly execute the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required
documentation related to the Contract, it will be difficult and impracticable to ascertain and
determine the amount of damage that Owner will sustain by reason of any such failure. For such
reason, every Bidder shall, by submitting its Bidder's Proposal, be deemed to agree that Owner
-4-
INSTRUCTIONS
shall have the right, at its option in the event of any such default, to retain or recover as
reasonably estimated liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the entire amount of the Bid
Security or five percent of the Bidder's Price Proposal, whichever is greater, or to exercise any
and all equitable remedies it may have against the defaulting Bidder.
9. Submission of Bidder's Proposal
One copy of each Bidder's Proposal, properly signed, together with all other required
documents, shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope or package and shall be addressed and
delivered to the place, before the time, and in the manner designated in the Invitation for
Bidder's Proposals. All Bidder's Proposals received after the time for the opening of bids
specified in the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals will be returned unopened.
Each sealed envelope or package containing a Bidder's Proposal shall be identified as
such and shall be marked with the title of the Contract and Bidder's full legal name. All
Addenda will be considered part of each Bidder's Proposal whether attached or not.
10. Withdrawal of Bidder's Proposal
Any Bidder's Proposal may be withdrawn at any time prior to the opening of any
Bidder's Proposal, provided that a request in writing, executed by Bidder in the manner specified
in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders, for the withdrawal of such Bidder's
Proposal is filed with Owner prior to the opening of any Bidder's Proposal. The withdrawal of a
Bidder's Proposal prior to opening of any Bidder's Proposal will not prejudice the right of
Bidder to file a new Bidder's Proposal.
No Bidder's Proposal shall be withdrawn without the consent of Owner for a period of
60 days after the opening of any Bidder's Proposal. Any Bidder's Proposal may be withdrawn at
any time following the expiration of said 60 day period, provided that a request in writing,
executed by Bidder in the manner specified in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders,
for the withdrawal of such Bidder's Proposal is filed with Owner after said 60 day period. If no
such request is filed, the date for acceptance of such Bidder's Proposal shall be deemed to be
extended until such a request is filed or until Owner executes a Contract pursuant to the
Invitation for Bidder's Proposals or until Owner affirmatively and in writing rejects such
Bidder's Proposal.
11. Oualification of Bidders
A. Factors. Owner intends to award the Contract only to a Bidder that furnishes
satisfactory evidence that it has the requisite experience, ability, capital, facilities, plant,
orgarization and staffrng to enable it to perform the Work successfully and promptly and to
complete the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time.
B. Additional Information. Owner reserves the right to require from any Bidder,
prior to award of the Contract, a detailed statement regarding the business and technical
organizations and plant of Bidder that is available for the Work. Information pertaining to
-5-
INSTRUCTIONS
financial resources, experience of personnel, contract defaults, litigation history, and pending
construction projects may also be requested.
C. Final Determination. The final selection of the successful Bidder shall be made
on the basis of the amount of the Bidder's Price Proposals, Owner's prior experience with the
Bidders, Owner's knowledge of the Bidders' performance on other relevant projects, any
additional information submitted by Bidders to satisfu Owner that Bidders are adequately
prepared to fulfrll the Contract, and all other relevant facts or matters mentioned in the Bid
Package or that Owner may legally consider in making its determination.
12. Disqualification of Bidders
A. More Than One Bidder's Proposal. No more than one Bidder's Proposal for the
Work described in the Contract shall be considered from any single corporation, partnership,
individual or joint venture, whether under the same or different names and whether or not in
conjunction with any other corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture. Reasonable
grounds for believing that any corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture is interested in
more than one Bidder's Proposal for the Work may cause the rejection of all Bidder's Proposals
in which such corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture is interested. Nothing
contained in this Subsection 12,A. shall prohibit any single corporation, partnership, individual or
joint venture, whether under the same or different names and whether or not in conjunction with
any other corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture, from submitting a bid or quoting
prices to more than one Bidder for equipment, materials and supplies or labor to be furnished as
a subcontractor or supplier.
B. Collusion. If there are reasonable grounds for believing that collusion exists
among any Bidders, all Bidder's Proposals of the participants in such collusion will not be
considered.
C. Default. If a Bidder is or has been in default on a contract with Owner or in the
payment of monies due Owner, its Bidder's Proposal will not be considered.
13. Award of Contract
A. Reservation of Rights. Owner reserves the right to accept the Bidder's Proposal
that is, in its judgment, the best and most favorable to the interests of Owner and the public; to
reject the low Price Proposal; to accept any item of any Bidder's Proposal: to reject any and all
Bidder's Proposals; to accept and incorporate corrections, clarifications or modifications
following the opening of the Bidder's Proposals when to do so would not, in Ormer's opinion,
prejudice the bidding process or create any improper advantage to any Bidder; and to waive
irregularities and informalities in the bidding process or in any Bidder's Proposal submitted;
provided, however, that the waiver of any prior defect or informality shall not be considered a
waiver of any future or similar defects or informalities, and Bidders should not rely on, or
anticipate, such waivers in submitting their Bidder's Proposals.
-6-
INSTRUCTIONS
B. Firm Offers. All Bidder's Proposals are firm offers to enter into the Contract and
no Bidder's Proposals shall be deemed rejected, notwithstanding acceptance of any other
Bidder's Proposal, until the Contract has been executed by both Owner and the successful Bidder
or until Owner affirmatively and in writing rejects such Bidder's Proposal.
C. Time of Award. It is expected that the award of the Contract, if it is awarded, will
be made within 45 days following the opening of the Bidder's Proposals. Should administrative
difficulties be encountered after the opening of the Bidder's Proposals, including the annulment
of any award, that may delay an award or subsequent award beyond such 45 day period, Owner
may accept any Bidder's Proposal for which the date for acceptance has been extended as
provided in Section 10 of these General Instructions to Bidders in order to avoid the need for re-
advertisement. No Bidder shall be under any obligation to extend the date for acceptance of its
Bidder's Proposal. Failure of one or more of the Bidders or their sureties to extend the date for
acceptance of its Bidder's Proposal shall not prejudice the right of Owner to accept any Bidder's
Proposal for which the date for acceptance has been extended.
14. Notice of Award: Effective Date of Award
If the Contract is awarded by Owner, such award shall be effective when a Notice of
Award in the form included in the Bid Package has been delivered to the successful Bidder
("Effective Date of Award"). Owner will prepare two copies of the Contract based on Bidder's
Proposal and will submit them to the successful Bidder with the Notice of Award.
15. Finalization of Contract
A. Finalization Date. Unless otherwise stated in the Notice of Award, the successful
Bidder shall satisfactorily complete all conditions precedent to signing the Contract before the
10th day after the Effective Date of Award or within such extended period as Owner may, in the
exercise of its sole discretion, authorTze tn writing after issuance of the Notice of Award
(" F inal i z at i o n D at e").
B. Conditions Precedent to Finalization. On or before the Finalization Date, the
successful Bidder shall: (i) sign (see Section 7), date as of the Finalization Date, and submit to
Owner both copies of the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required
documentation related to the Contract on or before the Finalization Date; and (2) submit two
executed copies of all required Bonds dated as of the Finalization Date and all certificates and
policies of insurance.
Failure to timely execute or submit any of the aforesaid documents shall be grounds for the
imposition of liquidated damages as more specifically set forth in Section 8 above. If the
submitted documents or any of them fail to comply with these General Instructions to Bidders or
the Contract or are not timely executed and submitted, Owner may, in its sole discretion, annul
the award or allow the successful Bidder an opportunity to correct the deficiencies.
-7-
TNSTRUCTIONS
In no event will Owner execute the Contract until any and all such deficiencies have been cured
or Owner has received adequate assurances, as determined by Owner, of complete and prompt
performance.
C. Finalization. On the Finalization Date, and provided that all documents required
to be submitted prior to or on the Finalization Date have been reviewed and determined by
Owner to be in compliance with these General Instructions to Bidders and the Contract, or
assurances of complete and prompt performance satisfactory to Owner have been received,
Owner shall execute all copies of the Contract and tender one copy to the successful Bidder at
the Finalization. The successful Bidder shall tender a copy to its surety company or companies.
16. Failure to Finalize
A. Annulment of Award: Liquidated Damaees. The failure or refusal of a successful
Bidder to comply with the conditions precedent to finalization or to properly frnalize and execute
the Contract shall be just cause for the annulment of the award and the imposition of liquidated
damages or the exercise of equitable remedies, both as more specifically set forth in Section 8
above.
B. Subsequent Awards. On annulment of an award, Owner may accept, and award a
Contract based on, any other Bidder's Proposal as Owner, in its sole judgment, deems to be the
best or may invite new Proposals or may abandon the bidding process or the Work.
-8-
PROPOSAL
WLLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
Full Name of Bidder ("Bidder")
Principal Offi ce Address
Local Office Address
Contact Person Telephone
TO: Village of Oak Brook ("Owner")
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook,IL 60523
Attention: Rania Serences, Senior Purchasing Assistant
Bidder warrants and represents that Bidder has carefully examined the Work Site described
below and its environs and has reviewed and understood all documents included, referred to, or
mentionedinthissetofdocuments,inc1udingAddendaNos.-,whicharesecure1y
stapled to the end of this Bidder's Proposal fif none, write'NONE"] ("Bid Package").
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that all terms capitalized in this Bidder's Proposal shall have
the meaning given to them in the documents included in the Bid Package.
1. Work Proposal
A. Contract and Work. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder
proposes, and agrees, that Bidder will contract with Owner, in the form of the Contract
included in the Bid Package: (1) to provide. perform and complete at the site or sites
described in the Bid Package ("Work Site") and in the manner described and specified in
the Bid Package all necessary work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials,
apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data
and other means and items necessary for the Fire Station 93 Bunk Room Renovation
Project which includes renovation of the existing bunk room and removal and
replacement of existing flooring materials in bunk room and in adjacent areas as
indicated in the drawings and described herein. The general contractor shall provide and
install all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes, but not necessarily
limited to, general interior demolition, new gypsum board partition walls, wood trim, new
electrical receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing electrical can lights, plastic
-9-
PROPOSAL
wall covering, carpet replacement, new rubber flooring, new fumiture and painting.
(2) to procure and furnish all permits, licenses and other govemmental approvals and
authorizations necessary in connection therewith except as otherwise expressly provided
in Attachment A to the Contract included in the Bid Package; (3) to procure and furnish
all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Bid Package; (4) to
pay all applicable federal, state and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of
Contractor by the Contract; and (6) to provide, perform and complete all of the foregoing
in a proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as required by or
pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is herein referred to as the "'Work."
B. Manner and Time of Performance. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder
proposes, and agrees, that Bidder will perform the Work in the manner and time prescribed in the
Bid Package and according to the requirements of Owner pursuant thereto.
C. General. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder proposes, and agrees, that
Bidder will do all other things required of Bidder or Contractor, as the case may be, by the Bid
Package.
2. Contract Price Proposal
If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will, except as otherwise provided in
Section2.l of the Contract, take in full payment for all Work and other matters set forth under
Section 1 above, including overhead and profit; taxes, contributions, and premiums; and
compensation to all subcontractors and suppliers, the compensation set forth on the following
"Schedule of Prices" ("Price Proposal"), which Schedule of Prices Bidder understands and
agrees will be made apart of the Contract:
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT
1. For providing, performing, and completing all Work, the total Contract Price of
(write in numbers):
$
In words
B. BASIS FOR DETERMINING PRICES
It is expressly understood and agreed that:
1. [DeletedJ
-10-
J.
4.
PROPOSAL
2. Owner is not subject to state or local sales, use and excise taxes and no such taxes are
included in this Schedule of Prices;
All other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to
the Work as well as all taxes, contributions. and premiums for unemployment insurance,
old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits are included
in this Schedule of Prices; and
All costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work
of patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions are included in this Schedule of Prices.
3. Contract Time Proposal
If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will commence the Work not later than the
"Commencement Date" set forth in Attachment A to the Contract and will perform the Work
diligently and continuously and will complete the Work not later than the "Completion Date" set
forth in Attachment A to the Contract.
4. Firm Proposal
All prices and other terms stated in this Bidder's Proposal are firm and shall not be
subject to withdrawal, escalation, or change for a period of 60 days after the date on which any
Bidder's Proposal is opened or such extended acceptance date for Bidder's Proposals as may be
established pursuant to Sections 10 and 13 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
5. Bidder Representations
A. No Collusion. Bidder warrants and represents that the only persons, firms, ot
corporations interested in this Bidder's Proposal as principals are those named in Bidder's Sworn
Acknowledgment attached hereto and that this Bidder's Proposal is made without collusion with
any other person, firm or corporation.
B. Not Barred. Bidder warrants, represents and certifies that it is not barred by law
from contracting with Owner or with any unit of state or local government.
C. Qualified. Bidder warrants and represents that Bidder has the requisite
experience, ability, capital, facilities, plant, organization and staff to enable Bidder to perform
the Work successfully and promptly and to commence and complete the Work within the
Contract Price and Contract Time Proposals set forth above. In support thereof, Bidder submits
the attached Swom Work History Statement. In the event Bidder is preliminarily deemed to be
one of the most favorable to the interests of Owner, Bidder hereby agrees to furnish on request,
within two business days or such longer period as may be set forth in the request, such additional
information as may be necessary to satisfy Owner that Bidder is adequately prepared to fulfrll the
Contract.
-11-
PROPOSAL
D. Owner's Reliance. Bidder acknowledges that Owner is relying on all warranties,
representations and statements made by Bidder in this Bidder's Proposal.
6. Surety and Insurance
Bidder herewith tenders surety and insurance commitment letters as specified in
Section 6 of the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals.
7. Bid Securitv
Bidder herewith tenders a Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond as specified in
Section 6 of the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals for 5 percent of Bidder's Price Proposal (*Bid
Security").
8. Owner's Remedies
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that should Bidder fail to timely submit all additional
information that is requested of it; or should Bidder, if Owner awards Bidder the Contract, fail to
timely submit all the Bonds and all the certificates and policies of insurance required of it; or
should Bidder, if Owner awards Bidder the Contract, fail to timely execute the Contract,
Contractor's Certification and all other required documentation related to the Contract, it will be
difficult and impracticable to ascertain and determine the amount of damage that Owner will
sustain by reason of any such failure and, for such reason, Owner shall have the right, at its
option in the event of any such default by Bidder, to retain or recover as reasonably estimated
liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the entire amount of the Bid Security or five percent of
Bidder's Price Proposal, whichever is greater, or to exercise any and all equitable remedies it
may have against Bidder.
9. Owner's Rights
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that Owner reserves the right to reject any and all
Bidder's Proposals, reserves the right to accept or reject any item of any Bidder's Proposal and
reserves such other rights as are set forth in Section 13 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
-t2-
PROPOSAL
10. Bidder's Obligations
In submitting this Bidder's Proposal, Bidder understands and agrees that it shall be bound
by each and every term, condition or provision contained in the Bid Package, which are by this
reference incorporated herein and made apart hereof.
DATED: .2016
Bidder
By:
Title:
Attest
By:
Title:
SEE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
- 13-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER' S SWORN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
("Deponenr"), being first duly sworn on oath,
deposes and states that the undersigned Bidder is organized as indicated below and that all
statements herein made are made on behalf of such Bidder in support of its Bidder's Proposal for
the above Contract and that Deponent is authorized to make them.
Deponent also deposes and states that Bidder has carefully prepared, reviewed and
checked its Bidder's Proposal and that the statements contained in its Bidder's Proposal and in
this Acknowledgement are true and correct.
COMPLETE APPLICABLE SECTION ONLY
1. Corporation
Bidder is a corporation that is organized and existing under the laws of the State of
, that is qualified to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating under
the legal name of
The offrcers of the corporation are as follows:
TITLE NAME
President
Vice President
Secretary
Treasurer
Partnership
Bidder is a partnership that
State of pursuant
that is qualified
ADDRESS
is organized, existing and registered under the laws of the
to that certain Partnership Agreement dated as of
to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating
2.
under the legal name of
-1-
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The general partners of the partnership are as follows:
NAME ADDRESS
3. Individual
Bidder is an individual as follows:
Full name:
Residence address:
Business address:
If operating under a trade or assumed
name that name is:
4. Joint Venture
Bidder is a joint venture that is organized and existing under the laws of the State of
pursuant to that certain Joint Venture Agreement dated as of , that is
qualified to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating under the legal name of
The signatories to the aforesaid Joint Venture Agreement are as follows:
NAME (ANd ENTITY TYPE) ADDRESS
t_)
T-J
t_-)
[For each signatory, indicate type of entity (Corporation : "C"; Partnership : "P"', and Individual
: "I") and provide, on separate sheets, the information required in Paragraph 7,2,or 3 above, as
applicablel
.\
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
DATED:20-.
Bidder
By:
Title:
Subscribed and Swom to before me on
Notary Public
My commission expires:
Attest
By'
Title:
20-.
SEE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-3-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'S SWORN WORK HISTORY STATEMENT
("Deponent"), being first duly sworn on
oath, deposes and states that all statements made in this Swom Work History Statement are made
on behalf of the undersigned Bidder in support of its Bidder's Proposal for the above Contract
and that Deponent is authorized to make them.
Deponent also deposes and states that Bidder has carefully prepared, reviewed
and checked this Sworn Work History Statement and that the statements contained in this Sworn
Work History Statement are true and correct.
IF NECESSARY FOR FULL DISCLOSURE, ADD SEPARATE SHEETS
JOINT VENTURES MUST SUBMIT SEPARATE
SWORN WORK HISTORY STATEMENTS FOR THE JOINT VENTURE
AND FOR EACH SIGNATORY TO THE JOINT VENTURE AGREEMENT
1. Nature of Business
State the nature of Bidder's business:
2. Composition of Work
During the past three years, Bidder's work has consisted of:
o/oFederal o/o As Contractor o/o Bidder's Forces
_% Other Public
_% Private
3. Years in Business
_% As Subcontractor _% Subcontractors
_% Materiais
State the number of years that Bidder, under its current name and organization, has been
continuously engaged in the aforesaid business: years
-1-
WORK HISTORY STATEMENT
4. Predecessor Organizations
If Bidder has been in business under its current name and organization for less than five years,
list any predecessor organizations:
NAME ADDRESS YEARS
5. Business Licenses
List all business iicenses currently held by Bidder:
ISSUING AGENCY TYPE NUMBER EXPIRATION
6. Related Experience
List three projects most comparable to the Work completed by Bidder, or its
predecessors, in the past five years:
PROJECT ONE PROJECT TWO PROJECT THREE
Owner Name
Owner Address
Reference
Telephone Number
Type of Work
.|
WORK HISTORY STATEMENT
PROJECT ONE PROJECT TWO PROJECT THREE
Contractor
(If Bidder was)
(Subcontractor)
Amount of Contract
Date Completed
DATED:
Bidder
.,20-.
By:
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on
Notary Public
My commission expires:
Attest
By:
Title:
20-.
SEE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-3-
VTLLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
BID PACKAGE
NOTICE OF AWARD
FROM: Village of Oak BrookTO:
("Contractor")
On
The Contract will be finalized and
office of Owner. The Contract will
to frnalization have been satisfied.
("Owner")
20-, Owner found to be most favorable to the interests of
executed on ,20-, at the above listed
be executed by Owner provided that all conditions precedent
Contractor must have complied with all conditions precedent
ownertheBidder,sProposalsubmittedbyContractoranddated-,20-,in
which Contractor proposes to contract with Owner, in the form of the Contract included in the
Bid Package to perform the following Work: (l) to provide, perform and complete at the Work
Site and in the manner described and specified in the Bid Package all necessary work, labor,
services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric,
water, waste disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for Fire Station 93
Bunk Room Renovation Project which includes renovation of the existing bunk room and
removal and replacement of existing flooring materials in bunk room and in adjacent areas as
indicated in the drawings and described herein. The general contractor shall provide and install
all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes, but not necessarily limited to,
general interior demolition, new gypsum board patition walls, wood trim, new electrical
receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing electrical can lights, plastic wall covering,
carpet replacement, new rubber flooring, new furniture and painting ; (2) to procure and furnish
all permits, licenses and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in
connection therewith except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contract
included in the Bid Package; (3) to procure and fumish all Bonds and all certificates and policies
of insurance specified in the Bid Package; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state and local taxes;
(5) to do all other things required of the Contractor by the Contract; and (6) to provide, perform
and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance
with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract.
OWNER ACCORDINGLY AWARDS CONTRACTOR, EFFECTIVE AS OF THE DATE
OF DELIVERY OF THIS NOTICE OF AWARD, THE CONTRACT FOR SAID WORK
FOR THE LUMP SUM AND/OR UNIT PRICES, AS THE CASE MAY BE, SET FORTH
IN THE BIDDER'S PROPOSAL.
-1-
NOTICE OF AWARI)
to finalization set forth in Section 15 of the General Instructions to Bidders included in the Bid
Package, on or before this date.
The failure or refusal to comply with the conditions precedent to finalization on or before the
Finalization Date or to execute the Contract on the Finalization Date shall result, at Owner's
option, in the imposition of liquidated damages and the annulment of this award, or in Owner's
exercise of any or all equitable remedies Owner may have, all as more specifically set forth in
Sections 8, 15, and 16 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
DATED:,20-.
Village of Oak Brook
By:
Name
Title
#34920191_v2
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM
RENOVATION PROJECT
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM
RENOVATION PROJECT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE I: THE WORK ............1
1.1 Performance of the Work ...................1
1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates ...............2
1.3 Required Submittals -.......-2
A. Submittals Required .........2
B. Number and Format ..........2
C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. ..........2
D. Responsibility for De1ay........ .............3
1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions .................3
1.5 Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings .....................3
1.6 Technical Ability to Perform ..............4
1.7 Financial Ability to Perform ............-..4
1.8 Time......... .......4
1.9 Safety at the Work Site........... ............4
1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs... .......5
i.l1 Damage to the Work, the Work Site. and Other Property.... ...............--...5
1.12 Subcontractors and Suppliers -.-.-........ 5
A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers............. ........-.-.-....... 5
B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers ............ ...............'.6
1.13 Simultaneous Work By Others -.......-.. 6
l.l4 Occupancy Priorto Final Payment............ ...........6
1 . 1 5 Owner' s Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience .. .. ...... .. .... .... .. . -. ... .. 6
A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience ............. ............6
B. Payment for Completed Work... .........6
ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS. -.------..............7
-l-
2.1 Changes ..........7
2.2 Delays .............7
A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays ............. ........7
B. No Compensation for Delays ...........-.7
ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTM WORK.......7
3.1 Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects. ..........7
A. Inspection .......7
B. Re-Inspection............ ........7
C. Correction .......8
3.2 Warranty of Work.... .........8
A. Scope of Warranty............... ...............8
B. Repairs; Extension of Warranty ............... ............8
C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties ................8
3.3 Ormer's Right to Correct ...................8
ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES.......... ........9
4.1 Bonds....... .......9
4.2 Insurance.. .......9
4.3 Indemnification.......... .......9
ARTICLE V: PAYMENT........ .......................9
5.1 Contract Price......... ..........9
5.2 Taxes and Benefits .............. ...............9
5.3 Progress Payments.. ........10
A. Payment in Installments .......... .........10
B. Pay Requests............. ......10
C. Work Entire ....................10
5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Payment .................10
A. Notice of Completion............ ........... l0
B. Punch List and Final Acceptance .....10
C. Final Payrnent............ .....10
5.5 Liens ............. 11
A. Tit1e.......... .....11
B. Waivers of Lien ..............11
C. Removal of Liens ...........11
D. Protection of Owner Only ......... .......11
-11-
5.6 Deductions ......................11
A. Owner's fught to WithhoId............... ................. 11
B. Use of Withheld Funds .....................12
ARTICLE W: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES................ ......-..........12
6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure ..........12
A. Notice of Disputes and Objections........... ..........12
B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections........... ....................12
6.2 Contractor's Remedies ............... ......13
6.3 Owner's Remedies.. ........13
6.4 Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay.. ............14
6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience ......... ............14
ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS...........................14
7.1 Binding Effect ................14
7.2 Relationship of the Parties...... ..........15
7.3 No Collusion/Prohibited Interests ......................15
7.4 Assignment .....................15
7 .5 Confidential Information............ ...... 15
7.6 No Waiver ......................16
7.7 No Third Party Beneficiaries.... ........ 16
7.8 Notices ..........16
7.9 Goveming Laws ........ .....17
7.10 Changes in Laws..... ....-...17
7.11 Compliance with Laws .....................17
A. Compliance Required .....17
B. Liability for Fines, Penalties... ..........17
C. Prevaiiing Wage Act............ .............17
D. Required Provisions Deemed lnserted ...............18
7.12 Compliance with Patents ..................18
A. Assumption of Costs, Royalties, and Fees ........' i8
B. Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined ..................18
7 .13 Time......... ..... 18
7.14 Severability ..................... 19
7.15 Entire Agreement ............19
7 .16 Amendments................ ..................... 19
-l1l-
Contractor's Certification
Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms
Attachment B: Specifications
Attachment C: List of Drawings
Attachment D: Special Project Requirements
Appendix 1: Prevailing Wages
Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond
Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond
-iv-
1.1
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION
PROJECT
In consideration of the mutual promises set forth below, the Village of Oak Brook, 1200
Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, 60523, an Illinois municipal corporation ("Owner"),
a Corporation ("Contractor"), make this Contract as of
Date") and hereby agree as follows:
2016, (the "Effective
ARTICLE I: THE WORK
Performance of the Work
Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must provide, perform, and complete all of the
following, all of which is herein referred to as the "Worll':
Labor. Equipment. Materials. and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in
the manner described and specified in this Contact, all necessary work, labor,
services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels,
gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items
necessary to accomplish the Project at the Work Site, both as defined in
Attachment A, in accordance with the specifications attached hereto as
Attachment B, the drawings identified in the list attached hereto as Attachment C,
and the Special Project Requirements attached hereto as Attachment D.
Permits. Except as otherwise provided in Attachment A, procure and furnish all
permits, licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary
in connection therewith.
Bonds and Insurance. Procure and furnish all Bonds and all cetificates of
insurance specified in this Contract.
Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes.
Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by this Contract,
including without limitation arranging for utility and other services needed for the
Work and for testing, including the installation of temporary utility lines, wiring,
switches, fixtures, hoses, connections, and meters, and providing sufficient
sanitary conveniences and shelters to accommodate all workers and all personnel
of Owner engaged in the Work.
1.
2.
a
4.
5.
-1-
CONTRACT
6. Quality. Provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and
workmanlike manner, consistent with the highest standards of professional and
construction practices and in fulI compliance with, and as required by or pursuant
to, this Contract, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition
consistent therewith, with only new, undamaged and first quality equipment,
materials, and supplies.
1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates
Contractor must commence the Work not later than the "Commencement Date" set forth
on Attachment A and must diligently and continuously prosecute the Work at such a rate as will
allow the Work to be fully provided, performed, and completed in full compliance with this
Contract not later than the "Completion Date" set forth in Attachment A. The time of
commencement, rate of progress, and time of completion are referred to in this Contract as the
"Contract Time."
1.3 Required Submittals
A. Submittals Required. Contractor must submit to Owner all documents, data, and
information specifically required to be submitted by Contractor under this Contract and must, in
addition, submit to Owner all such drawings, specifications, descriptive information, and
engineering documents, data, and information as may be required, or as may be requested by
Owner, to show the details of the Work, including a complete description of all equipment,
materials, and supplies to be provided under this Contract ("Required Submittals"). Such details
must include, but are not limited to, design data, structural and operating features, principal
dimensions, space required or provided, clearances required or provided, type and brand of
finish, and all similar matters, for all components of the Work.
B. Number and Format. Contractor must provide three complete sets for each
Required Submittal. All Required Submittals must be prepared on white 8-ll2"xl1" paper.
C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. All Required Submittals must be
provided to Owner no later than the time, if any, specified in this Contract for their submission
or. if no time for submission is specified, in sufficient time, in Owner's sole opinion, to permit
Owner to review the same prior to the commencement of the part of the Work to which they
relate and prior to the purchase of any equipment, materials, or supplies that they describe.
Owner will have the right to require such corrections as may be necessary to make such
submittals conform to this Contract. All such submittals will, after final processing and review
with no exception noted by Owner, become a part of this Contract. No Work related to any
submittal may be performed by Contractor until Owner has completed review of such submittal
with no exception noted. Owner's review and stamping of any Required Submittal will be for
the sole purpose of examining the general management, design, and details of the proposed
Work, does not relieve Contractor of the entire responsibility for the performance of the Work in
full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to this Contract, and may not be regarded as
any assumption of risk or liability by Owner.
.|
CONTRACT
D. Responsibilit), for Delav. Contractor is responsible for any delay in the Work due
to delay in providing Required Submittals conforming to this Contract.
1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions
Contractor represents and warrants that it has carefully reviewed this Contract, including
all of its Attachments, and the drawings identified in Attachment C, all of which are by this
reference incorporated into and made a part of this Contract. Contractor must, at no increase in
the Contract Price, provide workmanship, equipment, materials, and supplies that fully conform
to this Contract. Whenever any equipment, materiais or supplies are specified or described in
this Contract by using the name or other identifying feature of a proprietary product or the name
or other identifying feature of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned is
understood as establishing the type, function and quality desired. Other manufacturers' or
vendors' products may be accepted, provided that the products proposed are equivalent in
substance and function to those named as determined by Owner in its sole and absolute
discretion.
Contractor must promptly notify Owner of any discrepancy, elror, omission, ambiguity,
or conflict among any of the provisions of this Contract before proceeding with any Work
affected thereby. If Contractor fails to give such notice to Owner, then the subsequent decision
of Owner as to which provision of this Contract governs is final, and any corrective work
required does not entitle Contractor to any damages, to any compensation in excess of the
Contract Price, or to any delay or extension of the Contract Time.
When the equipment, materials, or supplies furnished by Contractor cannot be installed as
specified in this Contract, Contractor must, without any increase in the Contract Price, make all
modifications required to properly install the equipment, materials, or supplies. Any such
modification is subject to the prior review and consent of Owner.
1.5 Conditions at the Work Siter Record Drawines
Contractor represents and warrants that it has had a sufficient opporrunity to conduct a
thorough investigation of the Work Site and the surrounding area and has completed such
investigation to its satisfaction. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in
excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time based upon
conditions found at, or in the vicinity of, the Work Site. When information pertaining to
subsurface, underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings. test pits, utility
locations or conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other
investigations is or has been provided by Owner, or is or has been otherwise made available to
Contractor by Owner, such information is or has been provided or made available solely for the
convenience of Contractor and is not part of this Contract. Owner assumes no responsibility
whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of such information, and there is no guaranty
or warranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those
existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the conditions indicated are representative
of those existing at any particular location. or that the conditions indicated may not change, or
that unanticipated conditions may not be present.
-J-
CONTRACT
Contractor is solely responsible for locating all existing underground installations by
prospecting no later than two workdays prior to any scheduled excavation or trenching,
whichever is earlier. Contractor must check all dimensions, elevations, and quantities indicated
in this Contract within the same time period as set forth above for prospecting underground
installations. Contractor must lay out the Work in accordance with this Contract and must
establish and maintain such locations, lines and levels. Wherever pre-existing work is
encountered, Contractor must verifu and be responsible for dimensions and location of such pre-
existing work. Contractor must notifu Owner of any discrepancy between the dimensions,
elevations and quantities indicated in this Contract and the conditions of the Work Site or any
other errors, omissions or discrepancies which Contract may discover during such inspections.
Full instructions will be fumished by Owner should such error, omission, or discrepancy be
discovered, and Contractor must carry out such instructions as if originally specified and without
any increase in Contract Price.
Before Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor must submit to Owner two sets of
Drawings of Record, unless a greater number is specified elsewhere in this Contract, indicating
all field deviations from Attachment B or the drawings identified in Attachment C.
1.6 Technical Abilitv to Perform
Contractor represents and warrants that it is sufficiently experienced and competent, and
has the necessary capital, facilities, plant, organization, and staff, to provide, perform and
complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract.
1.7 Financial Abilitv to Perform
Contractor represents and warrants that it is financially solvent, and Contractor has the
financial resources necessary to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance
with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract.
1.8 Time
Contractor represents and warrants that it is ready, willing, able and prepared to begin the
Work on the Commencement Date and that the Contract Time is sufficient time to permit
completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract
for the Contract Price, all with due regard to all natural and man-made conditions that may affect
the Work or the Work Site and all difficulties, hindrances, and delays that may be incident to the
Work.
1.9 Safetv at the Work Site
Contractor is solely and completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe
conditions at the Work Site, including the safety of all persons and property during performance
of the Work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours.
-4-
CONTRACT
Contractor must take all safety precautions as necessary to comply with all applicable laws and
to prevent injury to persons and damage to property.
Contractor must conduct all of its operations without intemrption or interference with
vehicular and pedestrian traffic on public and private rights-of-way, unless it has obtained
permits therefor from the proper authorities. If any public or private right-of-way are rendered
unsafe by Contractor's operations, Contractor must make such repairs or provide such temporary
ways or guards as are acceptable to the proper authorities.
1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs
Contractor must keep the Work Site and adjacent areas clean at all times during
performance of the Work and must, upon completion of the Work, leave the Work Site and
adjacent areas in a clean and orderly condition.
1.11 Damage to the Work. the Work Site. and Other Propertv
The Work and everything pertaining thereto is provided, performed, completed, and
maintained at the sole risk and cost of Contractor from the Commencement Date until Final
Payment. Contractor is fully responsible for the protection of all public and private property and
all persons. Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor must, at its own cost and expense,
provide all permanent and temporary shoring, anchoring and bracing required by the nature of
the Work in order to make all parts absolutely stable and rigid, even when such shoring,
anchoring and bracing is not explicitly specified, and support and protect all buildings, bridges,
roadways, conduits, wires, water pipes, gas pipes, sewers, pavements, curbs, sidewalks, fixtures
and landscaping of all kinds and all other public or private property that may be encountered or
endangered in providing, performing and completing the Work. Contractor will have no claim
against Owner because of any damage or loss to the Work or to Contractor's equipment,
materials. or supplies from any cause whatsoever, including damage or loss due to simultaneous
work by others. Contractor must, promptly and without charge to Owner, repair or replace, to
the satisfaction of Owner, any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work and any
damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work Site or other property as a result of the
Work. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, Contractor's obligations under this
Section exist without regard to, and may not be construed to be waived by, the availability or
unavailability of any insurance, either of Owner or Contractor, to indemnifu, hold harmless, or
reimburse Contractor for the cost of any repair or replacement work required by this Section.
l.l2 Subcontractors and Suppliers
A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Contractor must perform the
Work with its own personnel and under the management, supervision, and control of its own
organization unless otherwise approved by Owner in writing. All subcontractors, suppliers, and
subcontracts used by Contractor must be acceptable to, and approved in advance by, Owner.
Owner's approval of any subcontractor, supplier, and subcontract does not relieve Contractor of
full responsibility and liability for the provision, performance, and completion of the Work in
full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. All Work performed
-5-
CONTRACT
under any subcontract is subject to all of the provisions of this Contract in the same manner as if
performed by employees of Contractor. Every reference in this Contract to "Contractor" is
deemed also to refer to all subcontractors and suppliers of Contractor. Every subcontract must
include a provision binding the subcontractor or supplier to all provisions of this Contract.
B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers. If any subcontractor or supplier fails
to perform the part of the Work undertaken by it in a manner satisfactory to Owner, Contractor
must immediately upon notice from Owner terminate such subcontractor or supplier. Contractor
will have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay
or extension of the Contract Time as a result of any such termination.
1.13 Simultaneous Work Bv Others
Owner has the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire
in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Contractor. Contractor
must make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the
Work and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other.
Contractor must afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of
such other work and must properly coordinate the Work with such other work.
l.l4 Occupancv Prior to Final Payment
Owner will have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service any part of
the Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service must be
conducted in such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with
the progress of the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placement in service may be construed as
an acceptance of any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor's duty to insure and
protect the Work, nor may it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner, be considered as an
interference with Contractor's provision, performance, or completion of the Work.
1.15 owner's Right to Terminate or suspend work for Convenience
A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience. Owner has the right, for its
convenience, to terminate or suspend the Work in whole or in part at any time by *ritt.n notice
to Contractor. Every such notice must state the extent and effective date of such termination or
suspension. On such effective date, Contractor must, as and to the extent directed, stop Work
under this Contract, cease all placement of further orders or subcontracts, terminate or suspend
Work under existing orders and subcontracts, cancel any outstanding orders or subcontracts thatmay be cancelled, and take any action necessary to protect any property in its possession inwhich Owner has or may acquire any interest and to dispose of such piop".ty in such manner as
may be directed by Owner.
B' Payment for Completed Work. In the event of any termination pursuant to
Subsection 1.154 above, Owner mustpay Contractor (1)such direct costs, excluding overhead,
as Contractor has paid or incurred for all Work done in compliance with, and as required by or
pursuant to, this Contract up to the effective date of termination together with ten perient of such
-6-
CONTRACT
costs for overhead and profit; and (2) such other costs pertaining to the Work, exclusive of
overhead and profit, as Contractor may have reasonably and necessarily incurred as the result of
such termination. Any such payrnent may be offset by any prior palment or payments and is
subject to Owner's rights to withhold and deduct as provided in this Contract.
ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS
2.1 Chanses
Owner has the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the
Contract, the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time ("Change Order"). If any Change
Order causes an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Time may be made. All claims by Contractor for an equitable
adjustment in either the Contract Price or the Contract Time must be made within two business
days following receipt of such Change Order, and may, if not made prior to such time, be
conclusively deemed to have been waived. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by
any Change Order will entitle Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or
other compensation.
2.2 Delays
A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays. For any delay that may result from causes
that could not be avoided or controlled by Contractor, Contractor must, upon timely written
application, be entitled to issuance of a Change Order providing for an extension of the Contract
Time for a period of time equal to the delay resulting from such unavoidable cause. No
extension of the Contract Time will be allowed for any other delay in completion of the Work.
B. No Compensation for Delays. No payrnent, compensation, damages, or
adjustment of any kind, other than the extension of the Contract Time provided in Subsection
22A above, may be made to, or claimed by, Contractor because of hindrances or delays from
any cause in the commencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work, whether caused by
Owner or any other party and whether avoidable or unavoidable.
ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR,S RESPONSIBILITY FOR
DEFECTIVE WORK
3.1 Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects
A. Inspection. Until Final Payment, all parts of the Work are subject to inspection
and testing by Owner or its designated representatives. Contractor must fumish, at its own
expense, all reasonable access, assistance, and facilities required by Owner for such inspection
and testing.
B. Re-Inspection. Re-inspection and re-testing of any Work may be ordered by
Owner at any time, and, if so ordered, any covered or closed Work must be uncovered or opened
by Contractor. If the Work is found to be in full compliance with this Contract, then Owner must
-7-
CONTRACT
pay the cost of uncovering, opening, re-inspecting, or re-testing, as the case may be. If such
Work is not in full compliance with this Contract, then Contractor must pay such cost.
C. Correction. Until Final Payment. Contractor must, promptly and without charge,
repair, correct, or replace all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, or
unsuitable or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of this Contract.
3.2 Warranfv of Work
A. Scope of Warranty. Contractor warrants that the Work and all of its components
will be free from defects and flaws in design, workmanship, and materials; must strictly conform
to the requirements of this Contract; and will be fit, sufficient, and suitable for the purposes
expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty herein expressed is in
addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law,
which are hereby reserved unto Owner.
B. Repairs: Extension of Warranty. Contractor, promptly and without charge, must
correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that may be discovered or develop at any time
within one year after Final Payment or such longer period as may be prescribed in Attachment B
or Attachment D to this Contract or by law. The above warranty may be extended automatically
to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty
and Contractor's obligation to correct Work may be extended for a period of one year from the
date of such repair or replacement. The time period established in this Subsection 3.2B relates
only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work and may not be construed to
establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that Contractor has under this
Contract.
C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties. Whenever Attachment B or Attachment
D requires a subcontractor or supplier to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor is solely
responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning
said warranty or guaranty to Owner. Acceptance of any assigned warranties or guaranties by
Owner is a precondition to Final Payment and does not relieve Contractor of any of its guaranty
or warranty obligations under this Contract.
3.3 Owner's Right to Correct
If, within two business days after Owner gives Contractor notice of any defect, damage,
flaw, unsuitability, nonconformity, or failure to meet warranty subject to correction by
Contractor pursuant to Section3.l or Section 3.2 of this Contract, Contractor neglects to make,
or undertake with due diligence to make, the necessary colrections, then Owner is entitled to
make, either with its own forces or with contract forces, the corrections and to recover from
Contractor all resulting costs, expenses, losses, or damages, including attomeys' fees and
administrative expenses.
-8-
CONTRACT
ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES
4.1 Bonds
Contemporaneous with Contractor's execution of this Contract, Contractor must provide
a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, on forms provided by, or
otherwise acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company licensed to do business in the State of
Illinois with a general rating of A and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's
Insurance Guide, each in the penal sum of the Contract Price ("Bonds"). Contractor, at all times
while providing, performing, or completing the Work, including, without limitation, at all times
while correcting any failure to meet warranty pursuant to Section 3.2 of this Contract, must
maintain and keep in force, at Contractor's expense, the Bonds required hereunder.
4.2 Insurance
Contractor hereby agrees and will, at its expense, carry insurance pursuant to the terms,
conditions, and coverages set forth in Attachment A.
4.3 Indemnification
Contractor hereby agrees to and will indemnify and save harmless Owner and all of it
elected officials, officers, employees, attomeys, agents, and representatives against any and all
lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees
and administrative expenses, that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection
with Contractor's performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof, whether or
not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence
or fault of Contractor, except to the extent caused solely by the negligence of Owner.
ARTICLE V: PAYMENT
5.1 Contract Price
Owner must pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and
conditions set forth in this Article V and Attachment A, and Contractor must accept in fulI
satisfaction for providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amount or amounts set
forth in Attachment A (the "Contract Price"), subject to any additions, deductions, or
withholdings provided for in this Contract.
5.2 Taxes and Benefits
Owner is exempt from and will not be responsible to pay, or reimburse Contractor for,
any state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. The Contract Price includes all other applicable
federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes,
contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits,
pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits. All claim or right to claim additional compensation
-9-
CONTRACT
by reason of the payment of any such tax, contribution, or premium is hereby waived and
released by Contractor.
5.3 Progress Pavments
A. Palzment in Installments. The Contract Price must be paid in monthly
installments in the manner set forth in Attachment A ("Progress payments").
B. Pay Requests. The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the payment of invoices on
the second and fourth Tuesday of the month. For consideration on one of thes. dates, paynent
request must be received no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the second or fourth Tulsday of
the month. Each Pay Request must include (a) Contractor's certification of the value of, and
partial or final waivers of lien covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and
(b) Contractor's certification that all prior Progress Payments have been property apptied to the
payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were pula.
C. Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole isof the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and
every part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another andto Owner's obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for
the Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for
the convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose.
A. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all
respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor must notifu Owner and iequest a final inspection("Notice of Completion"). Contractor's Notice of Completion must be given sufficiently inadvance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduiing of the final inspection and forcompletion or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection
as being defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable. nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not infull compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract ("pinch List Worll,).
B. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work may be finally accepted when, andonly when, the whole and all parts thereof have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner infull compliance with, and as required by or pursuant io, this Contract. Upon receipt ofContractor's Notice of Completion, Owner must make a review of the Work and notifi,Contractor in writing of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. FollowingContractor's completion or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner must make another reviewof the Work and prepare and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional punch ListWork to be completed or corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work (,,Final
Acceptance").
C. Final Palnnent. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor mustsubmit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided 6y Owner (,,Final
Pay Requesf"). Owner must pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract price, after deiucting
5.4
-10-
CONTRACT
therefrom all charges against Contractor as provided for in this Contract ("Final Payment").
Final Payment must be made not later than 60 days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request.
The acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment will operate as a fulI and complete release of
Owner of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and
expenses of, by, or to Contractor for anlthing done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in
connection with the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of,
relating to, or in connection with the Work.
5.5 Liens
A. Title. Nothing in this Contract may be construed as vesting in Contractor any
right of property in any equipment, materials, supplies, and other items provided under this
Contract after they have been installed in, incorporated into, attached to, or affixed to, the Work
or the Work Site. All such equipment, materials, supplies, and other items will, upon being so
installed, incorporated, attached or affixed, become the property of Owner, but such title will not
release Contractor from its duty to insure and protect the Work in accordance with the
requirements of this Contract.
B. Waivers of Lien. Contractor must, from time to time at Owner's request and in
any event prior to Final Payment, furnish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates,
and other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that
no lien against the Work or the public funds held by Owner exists in favor of any person
whatsoever for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item furnished, labor
performed, or other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract ("Lien") and that no
right to file any Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever.
C' Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor
must, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until
such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner will have the right to retain from any money
payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisfi sucl
Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and administraiive expenses, of
any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof.
D. Protection of Owner Only. This Section does not operate to relieve Contractor,s
surety or sureties from any of their obligations under the Bonds, nor may it be deemed to vest
any right, interest, or entitlement in any subcontractor or supplier. Owner's retention of funds
pursuant to this Section is deemed solely for the protection of its own interests pending removal
of such Liens by Contractor, and Owner will have no obligation to apply such funds to such
removal but may, nevertheless, do so where Owner's interests would tt"iiUy be served.
5.6 Deductions
A. Owner's Risht to Withhold. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract
and without prejudice to any of Owner's other rights or remedies, Owner will have the right at
any time or times, whether before or after approval of any Pay Request, to deduct and withhold
from any Progress or Final Payment that may be or become due under this Contract such amount
-11-
CONTRACT
as may reasonably appear necessary to compensate Owner for any actual or prospective loss due
to: (1) Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete;
(2) damage for which Contractor is liable under this Contract; (3) state or local sales, use, or
excise taxes from which Owner is exempt; (4) Liens or claims of Lien regardless of merit;
(5) claims of subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons regardless of merit; (6) delay in the
progress or completion of the Work; (7) inability of Contractor to complete the Work; (8) failure
of Contractor to properly complete or document any Pay Request; (9) any other failure of
Contractor to perform any of its obligations under this Contract; or (10)the cost to Owner,
including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, of correcting any of the aforesaid matters or
exercising any one or more of Owner's remedies set forth in Section 6.3 of this Contract.
B. Use of Withheld Funds. Owner is entitled to retain any and all amounts withheld
pursuant to Subsection 5.6.4 above until Contractor has either performed the obligations in
question or furnished security for such performance satisfactory to Owner. Owner is entitled to
apply any money withheld or any other money due Contractor under this Contract to reimburse
itself for any and all costs, expenses, losses, damages, liabilities, suits, judgments, awards,
attorneys' fees and administrative expenses incurred, suffered, or sustained by Owner and
chargeable to Contractor under this Contract.
ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES
6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure
A. Notice of Disputes and Objections. If Contractor disputes or objects to any
requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision of Owner,
Contractor may notify Owner in writing of its dispute or objection and of the amount of any
equitable adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time to which Contractor claims it will be
entitled as a result thereof; provided, however, that Contractor must, nevertheless, proceed
without delay to perform the Work as required, directed, instructed, interpreted, determined, or
decided by Owner, without regard to such dispute or objection. Unless Contractor so notifies
Owner within two business days after receipt of such requirement, direction, instruction,
interpretation, determination, or decision, Contractor is conclusively deemed to have waived all
such disputes or objections and all claims based thereon.
B. Neqotiation of Disputes and Objections. To avoid and settle without litigation
any such dispute or objection, Owner and Contractor agree to engage in good faith negotiations.
Within three business days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's written notice of dispute or
objection, a conference between Owner and Contractor will be held to resolve the dispute.
Within three business days after the end of the conference, Owner must render its final decision,
in writing, to Contractor. If Contractor objects to the final decision of Owner, then it must,
within three business days, give Owner notice thereof and, in such notice, must state its final
demand for settlement of the dispute. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner, Contractor will be
conclusively deemed (1)to have agreed to and accepted Owner's final decision and (2)to have
waived all claims based on such final decision.
-12-
CONTRACT
6.2 Contractor's Remedies
If Owner fails or refuses to satisfu a final demand made by Contractor pursuant to
Section 6.1 of this Contract, or to otherwise resolve the dispute which is the subject of such
demand to the satisfaction of Contractor, within 10 days after receipt of such demand. then
Contractor will be entitled to pursue such remedies, not inconsistent with the provisions of this
Contract, as it may have in law or equity.
6.3 Owner's Remedies
If it should appear at any time prior to Final Payment that Contractor has failed or refused
to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence at a rate that assures
completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before
the Completion Date, or has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor's rights under this
Contract, either in whole or in part, or has falsely made any representation or warranty in this
Contract, or has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfy any other requirement
of this Contract or has failed to pay its debts as they come due ("Event of Default"), and has
failed to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Contractor's receipt of
written notice of such Event of Default, then Owner will have the right, at its election and
without prejudice to any other remedies provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of
the following remedies:
l. Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by
Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective,
damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove from the
Work Site any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take
any or all other action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict
compliance with this Contract.
2. Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the
accomplishment of the results stated in Paragraph 1 above and withhold or
recover from Contractor all the cost and expense, including attorneys' fees and
administrative costs, incurred by owner in connection therewith.
3. Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming,
incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in
the Contract Price.
Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for further payment of
amounts due or to become due under this Contract.
Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor's rights
under this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work,
evict Contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies. tools,
appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers
relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere. and either complete
4.
5.
-1 3-
CONTRACT
or correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor's
expense.
6. Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor's rights under this
Contract, and at Ormer's option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and
supplier contracts of Contractor will be deemed to be assigned to Owner without
any further action being required, but Owner may not thereby assume any
obligation for payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for
any Work provided or performed prior to such assignment.
7. Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or
not previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, ffiy and all costs,
including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, incurred by Owner as the
result of any Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response
to any Event of Default.
8. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner.
6.4 Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay
If the Work is not completed by Contractor, in fuII compliance with, and as required by
or pursuant to, this Contract, within the Contract Time as such time may be extended by Change
Order, then Owner may invoke its remedies under Section 6.3 of this Contract or may, in the
exercise of its sole and absolute discretion, permit Contractor to complete the Work but charge to
Contractor, ffid deduct from any Progress or Final Payments, whether or not previously
approved, administrative expenses and costs for each day completion of the Work is delayed
beyond the Completion Date, computed on the basis of the "Per Diem Administrative Charge"
set forth in Attachment A, as well as any additional damages caused by such deiay.
6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience
Any termination or suspension of Contractor's rights under this Contract for an alleged
default that is ultimately held unjustified will automatically be deemed to be a termination or
suspension for the convenience of Owner under Section 1 .l 5 of this Contract.
ARTTCLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS
AND REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Bindine Effect
This Contract is binding on Owner and Contractor and on their respective heirs,
executors, administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every
reference in this Contract to a party is deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers,
employees, agents, and representatives of such party.
-14-
CONTRACT
7.2 Relationship of the Parties
Contractor will act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work.
Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract may be construed (1) to create the relationship of
principal and agent, partners, or joint venturers between Owner and Contractor or (2) except as
provided in Paragraph 6.3(6) above, to create any relationship between Owner and any
subcontractor or supplier of Contractor.
7.3 NoCollusion/Prohibitedlnterests
Contractor hereby represents that the only persons, firms, or corporations interested in
this Contract as principals are those disclosed to Owner prior to the execution of this Contract,
and that this Contract is made without collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation. If at
any time it is found that Contractor has, in procuring this Contract, colluded with any other
person, firm, or corporation, then Contractor will be liable to Owner for all loss or damage that
Owner may suffer thereby, and this Contract will, at Owner's option, be null and void.
Contractor hereby represents and warrants that neither Contractor nor any person
affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have
an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is acting,
directly or indirectly, for or on behalf of any person, group, entity or nation named by the United
States Treasury Department as a Specially Designated National and Blocked Person, or for or on
behalf of any person, group, entity or nation designated in Presidential Executive Order 13224 as
a person who commits, threatens to commit, or supports terrorism, and neither Contractor nor
any person affrliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or
will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is,
directly or indirectly, engaged in, or facilitating, the Work on behalf of any such person, group,
entity or nation.
7,4 Assignment
Contractor may not (l) assign this Contract in whole or in part, (2) assign any of
Contractor's rights or obligations under this Contract, or (3) assign any payment due or to
become due under this Contract without the prior express written approval of Owner, which
approval may be withheld in the sole and unfettered discretion of Owner; provided, however,
that Owner's prior written approval will not be required for assignments of accounts, as defined
in the Illinois Commercial Code, if to do so would violate Section 9-318 of the Illinois
Commercial Code, 810 ILCS 519-318. Owner may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or
any or all of its rights or obligations under this Contract, without the consent of Contractor.
7.5 Confidentiallnformation
All information supplied by Owner to Contractor for or in connection with this Contract
or the Work must be held confidential by Contractor and may not, without the prior express
written consent of Owner, be used for any purpose other than performance of the Work.
-15-
CONTRACT
7.6 No Waiver
No examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination,
decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, nor any order by Owner for the payment of money,
nor any payment for, or use, occupancy, possession, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of
the Work by Owner, nor any extension of time granted by Owner, nor any delay by Owner in
exercising any right under this Contract, nor any other act or omission of Owner may constitute
or be deemed to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming
or incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise
diminish the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requirement
or provision of this Contract; or of any remedy, power, or right of Owner.
7.7 No Third Partv Beneficiaries
No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or
corporation other than Contractor may be made or be valid against Owner.
7.8 Notices
A1l notices required or permitted to be given under this Contract must be in writing and
are deemed received by the addressee thereof when delivered in person on a business day at the
address set forth below or on the third business day after being deposited in any main or branch
United States post office, for delivery at the address set forth below by properly addressed,
postage prepaid, certified or registered mail, retum receipt requested.
Notices and communications to Owner must be addressed to, and delivered at, the
following address:
Village of Oak Brook
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
Attention: Doug Patchin, Public Works Director
Notices and communications to Contractor must be addressed to. and delivered at. the
following address:
The foregoing may not be deemed to preclude the use of other non-oral means of
notification or to invalidate any notice properly given by any such other non-oral means.
-1 6-
CONTRACT
By notice complying with the requirements of this Section, Owner and Contractor each
have the right to change the address or addressee or both for all future notices to it, but no notice
of a change of address is effective until actually received.
7.9 Governing Laws
This Contract and the rights of Owner and Contractor under this Contract will be
interpreted according to the intemal laws, but not the conflict of laws rules, of the State of
Illinois; venue for any action related to this Contract will be in the Circuit Court of DuPage
County, Illinois.
7.10 Changes in Laws
Unless otherwise explicitly provided in this Contract, any reference to laws includes such
laws as they may be amended or modified from time to time.
7.11 Compliance with Laws
A. Compliance Required. Contractor must give all notices, pay all fees, and take all
other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and
completed in accordance with all required governmental permits, licenses or other approvals and
authorizations that may be required in connection with providing, performing, and completing
the Work, and with all applicable statutes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, including without
limitation the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (see Subsection C of this
Section) (a copy of the prevailing rate of wages ascertained by the Illinois Department of Labor,
in effect as of the date of this Contract, has been attached as an Appendix to this Contracq if the
Illinois Department of Labor revises the prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised
rate applies to this Contract); any other applicable prevailing wage laws; the Fair Labor
Standards Act; any statutes regarding qualification to do business; any statutes requiring
preference to laborers of specified classes; the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, 30 ILCS
5651I et seq.; any statutes prohibiting discrimination because of, or requiring affrrmative action
based on, race, creed, color, national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification,
including, without limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. $$ 12101
et seq., the Illinois Human Rights Acq 775 ILCS 5/1-101 et seq., and the Public Works
Discrimination Act, 775 ILCS 10/0.01 et seq.; and any statutes regarding safety or the
performance of the Work, including the Illinois Underground Utility Facilities Damage
Prevention Act,220ILCS 50/1 et seq., and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,29
U.S.C. $$ 651 et seq.
B. Liabilitv for Fines. Penalties. Contractor is solely liable for any fines or civil
penalties that are imposed by any govemmental or quasi-governmental agency or body that may
arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's, or its
subcontractors' or suppliers'. performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof.
C. Prevailine Wage Act. Contractor and each subcontractor, in order to comply with
the Prevailing Wage Act,820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (the "Act"), must submit to the Village a
-17 -
CONTRACT
certified payroll on a monthly basis, in accordance with Section 5 of the Act. The certified
payroll must consist of a complete copy of those records required to be made and kept by the
Act. The certified payroll must be accompanied by a statement signed by the contractor or
subcontractor that certifies that (1) such records are true and accurate, (2) the hourly rate paid is
not less than the general prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Act, and (3) the
contractor or subcontractor is aware that filing a certified payroll that he or she knows to be false
is a Class B misdemeanor. Contractor may rely on the certification of a subcontractor, provided
that Contractor does not knowingly rely on a subcontractot's false certification. On two business
days' notice, Contractor and each subcontractor must make available for inspection the records
required to be made and kept by the Act (i) to the Village and its officers and agents and to the
Director of the Illinois Department of Labor and his or her deputies and agents and (ii) at all
reasonable hours at a location within the State.
D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted. Every provision of law required by law to
be inserted into this Contract is deemed to be inserted herein.
7.12 Compliance with Patents
A. Assumption of Costs. Royalties. and Fees. Contractor will pay or cause to be paid
all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of
patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions.
B. Effect of Contractor Beinq Enjoined. Should Contractor be enjoined from
furnishing or using any equipment, materials, suppiies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions supplied or required to be supplied or used under this Contract, Contractor must
promptly offer substitute equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions in lieu thereof, of equal efficiency, quality, suitability, and market value, for review
by Owner. If Owner should disapprove the offered substitutes and should elect, in lieu of a
substitution, to have supplied, and to retain and use, any such equipment, materials, supplies,
tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions as may by this Contract be required to be
supplied, Contractor must pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite
and necessary for Owner to use such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices,
processes, or inventions without being disturbed or in any way interfered with by any proceeding
in law or equity on account thereof. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to make any approved
substitution promptly, or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be necessary,
then Owner will have the right to make such substitution, or Owner may pay such royalties and
secure such licenses and charge the cost thereof against any money due Contractor from Owner
or recover the amount thereof from Contractor and its surety or sureties notwithstanding that
Final Payment may have been made.
7.13 Time
The Contract Time is of the essence of this Contract. Except where otherwise stated,
references in this Contract to days is construed to refer to calendar days.
- 18-
CONTRACT
7.14 Severability
The provisions of this Contract will be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality
and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract is held invalid, illegal,
or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of
the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract will
be in any way affected thereby.
7.15 Entire Asreement
This Contract sets forth the entire agreement of Owner and Contractor with respect to the
accomplishment of the Work and the payment of the Contract Price therefor, and there are no
other understandings or agreements, oral or written, between Owner and Contractor with respect
to the Work and the compensation therefor.
7.16 Amendments
No modification, addition, deletion, revision, alteration or other change to this Contract is
effective unless and until such change is reduced to writing and executed and delivered by
Owner and Contractor.
ISTGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS]
-19-
By:
Name:
Title:
CONTRACT
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have caused this Contract to be
executed by their properly authorized representatives in two original counterparts as of the
Effective Date.
Village of Oak Brook
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
CONTRACTOR
By:
Name:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
-20-
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
STATE OF ILLINOIS
COLTNTY OF
CONTRACTOR' S CERTIFICATION
':ff::{:",:;:*y::r^:{";!;l#:,i:i"$':I
Contractor, that this deponent is authorized to make them, and that the statements contained
herein are true and correct.
Contractor deposes, states, and certifies that Contractor is not barred from contracting
with a unit of state or local government as a result of (i) a violation of either Section 33E-3 or
Section 338-4 of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 1961, 720 ILCS 5133F-l et sgq.; or (ii)
a violation of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 107 Public Law 56 (October 26,2001) (the
"Patriol Act") or other statutes, orders, rules, and regulations of the United States government
and its various executive departments, agencies and offices related to the subject matter of the
Patriot Act, including, but not limited to, Executive Order 13224 effective September 24,
2001.
DATED:,20-
CONTRACTOR
By:
Name:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on
My Commission expires:
Notary Public
(sEAL)
)
)SS
)
20
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
ATTACHMENT A
STIPPLEMENTAL SCI{EDTILE OF CONTRACT TERMS
[Check applicable boxes and insert required information.J
1. Proiect:
Renovation of the existing bunk room, and removal and replacement of existing
flooring materials in bunk room and in adjacent areas as indicated in the drawings and
described herein. The general contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless
noted otherwise. Scope of work includes, but not necessarily limited to, general
interior demolition, new gypsum board partition walls, wood trim, new electrical
receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing electrical can lights, plastic wall
covering, carpet replacement, new rubber flooring, new fumiture and painting.
2. Work Site:
Fire Station 93,725 Enterprise Drive, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523.
3. Permits. Licenses. ApDrovals. and Authorizations:
Contractor must obtain all required governmental permits, licenses, approvals, and
authorizations.
4. Commencement Date:
No work is to begin until all product and material are on site at Fire Station 93, but in
no event later than May 17,2016.
5. Completion Date:
July 12, 2016. The Completion Date will be subject to equitable adjustment if the
Commencement Date is delayed pursuant to Subsection2.2A of the Contract.
6. Insurance Coverage:
Certificates of lnsurance shall be presented to Owner within fifteen (15) days after the
receipt by the Contractor of the Notice of Award and the unexecuted contract, it being
understood and agreed that the Owner will not approve and execute the Contract until
acceptable insurance certificates are received and approved by Owner.
-1-
ATTACHMENT A
Each contractor performing any work pursuant to a contract with Owner and each
permittee working under a permit as required pursuant to the provisions of Title 1 of
Chapter 8 of the Code of Ordinances of the Village of Oak Brook (hereinafter referred to
as "lnsured") shall be required to carry such insurance as specified herein. Such contractor
and permittee shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract or permit
insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise
from or in connection with the performance of the work under the contract or permit,
either by the contractor, permittee, or their agents, representatives, employees or
subcontractors.
A contractor or permittee shall maintain insurance with limits no less than:
A. General Liability - $2,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily
injury, personal ittjury and properly damage, provided that when the estimated cost
of the work in question does not exceed $25,000, the required limit shall be
$1,000,000;
B. Automobile Liability (if applicable) - $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident
for bodily injury and property damage;
C. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability - Worker's Compensation limits
as required by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liabiliq,limits
of $ 1,000,000 per accident.
Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and approved by Owner. At
the option of Owner. either the inswer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self-
insured retention as respect to Owner, its offrcers, officials, employees and volunteers; or
the lnsured shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations,
claim administration and defense expenses to the extent of such deductible or self-insured
retention.
The poiicies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:
D. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage -
The Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered
as additional insureds as respects: liability arising out of activities
performed by or on behalf of the Insured; premises owned, occupied or used
by the Insured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope
of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees,
volunteers, or agents.
The lnsured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect to the
Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Any
insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials,
(1)
(2)
a
ATTACHMENT A
employees, volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the lnsured's insurance
and shall not contribute with it.
(3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not
affect coverage provided to the Owner, its offrcers, officials, employees,
volunteers or agents.
(4) The Insured's insurance shall apply separately to each covered party against
whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the
insurer's liability.
E. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage
The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its
officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from
work performed by the insured for the Owner.
Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended,
voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30)
days prior written notice by certified mail has been given to Owner. Each insurance
policy shall name the Owner, its officers, officials and employees, volunteers and agents
as Additional lnsureds. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no
less than A: VII.
Each lnsured shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance and with original
endorsements eflecting coverage required by this provision. The certificate and
endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that
insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be on
forms approved by the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Village Attorney
before work commences. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified
copies of all required insurance policies, at any time.
Each insured shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall fumish
separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for
subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.
D. Builders Risk Insurance. This insurance must be written in completed value
form, must protect Contractor and Owner against "all risks" qf direct physical
loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials to be used in providing,
performing, ffid completing the Work, including without limitation fire
extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage,
flood, earth movement and collapse, and must be designed for the
circumstances that may affect the Work.
a-J-
E.
ATTACHMENT A
This insurance must be written with limits not less than the insurable value of
the Work at completion. The insurable value must include the aggregate value
of Owner-furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by
Contractor.
This insurance must include coverage while equipment or materials are in
warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is
completed, but prior to Final Payment. This insurance must include coverage
while Owner is occupying all or any part of the Work prior to Final Payment
without the need for the insurance company's consent.
Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. Contractor, at its
sole cost and expense, must purchase this Insurance in the name of Owner with
a combined single limit for bodily inju.y and property damage of not less than
$1,000,000.
Umbrella Policy. The required coverage may be in the form of an umbrella
policy above $2,000,000 primary coverage. All umbrella policies must
provide excess coverage over underlying insurance on a following-form basis
so that, when any loss covered by the primary policy exceeds the limits under
the primary policy, the excess or umbrella policy becomes effective to cover
that loss.
Deductible. Each policy must have a deductible or self-insured retention of not
more than $
Owner as Additional Insured. Owner must be named as an Additional Insured
on the following policies:
General Liabiliw
The Additional Insured endorsement must identifr Owner as follows:
The Village of Oak Brook and its boards, commissions, committees,
authorities, employees, agencies, officers, voluntary associations, and other
units operating under the jurisdiction and within the appointment of its budget.
Other Parties as Additional Insureds. In addition to Owner, the following
parties must be named as additional insured on the following policies:
F.
G.
H.
-4-
Xr.
ATTACHMENT A
Additional Insured
Arcon Associates Inc.
Policy or Policies
Contract Price:
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT
1. For providing, performing, and completing all Work, the total Contract Price of
(write in numbers):
$
In words:
8.Progress Pavments:
General. Owner must pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work,
determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to
the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress
Payments. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to Final
Acceptance by Owner may not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price.
Value of Work. The Value of the Work will be determined as follows:
(1) Lump Sum Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis,
Contractor must, not later than 10 days after execution of the Contract
and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule
showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and
with substantiating data acceptable to Owner ("Breakdown Schedule").
The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule must equal the
amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum
Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for
overpayment of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be
performed first will not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule must be
revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment may
be made for any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and
Owner has approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule.
Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised
based on developments occurring during the provision and performance
of the Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown
Schedule that is acceptable to Owner, Owner will have the right either
A.
B.
-5-
ATTACHMENT A
to suspend Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to
make such Payments based on Owner's determination of the value of
the Work completed.
(2) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the
value of such Work will be determined by Owner on the basis of the
actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and
complete in place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in
the Schedule of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed
and complete in place will be measured on the basis described in
Attachment B to the Contract or, in the absence of such description, on
the basis determined by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price
Items stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only and
may not be used in establishing the Progress or Final Payments due
Contractor. The Contract Price will be adjusted to reflect the actual
number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete
in place upon Final Acceptance.
C. Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to
Contractor will be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with
respect to which they were paid and will not be applied to or used for any pre-
existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between
Contractor and any third party.
9. Per Diem Administrative Charse:
$500 per day.
10. StandardSpecifications:
The Contract also includes Owner's Village Code and Building Codes.
References to any of these codes means the latest editions effective on the date of the bid
opening.
See Attachment D for any special project requirements.
-6-
ATTACHMENT B
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
ATTACHMENT B
SPECIFICATIONS
-1-
SECTION 0133 OO
SHOP DRAWINGS. PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PART IGENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
L Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.02 CONFLICTS
A. In the event of any conflict between the provisions hereof and the provisions of the
General and Supplementary Conditions, the more stringent or higher quality requirements
shall apply.
I.O3 ELECTRONICSUBMITTALPROCEDURES
A. The following types of submittals shall be transmitted electronically as outlined in this
section.
l. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Manufacturer'sinstallationinstructions.
4. Specihed product lisr
B. Electronically transmit each submittal to the Architect as follows:
l. Submittals shall include an electronic letter of transmittal
2. Elecrronic submittals shall be made only in pDF format.
3. Electronic submittals shall be reviewed and returned in PDF format4. Electronic submittal file names shall be easily understood and shall include
relevant numeric reference (e.g. CSI Section Number) and naming conventions.5. Submitted using ARCON's Newforma website
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Each Contractor shall prepare a schedule of specific target dates for the submission and
return of shop drawings, product data and samples required by the Contract Documents.
The Schedule shall be divided into construction categories. All shop drawings and
product data for interrelated items shall be scheduled for submission at the same time.
The Shop Drawing Submittal Schedule, submitted by the Contractor, shall provide the
Architect with at least 15 calendar days from the date the Architect receives a submittal,
until the date the submittal is required to be mailed back to the Contractor.
B. All shop drawings, product data and samples shall bear the following identification:
SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
ARCON 15095 01 33 00 -1
1. Date of Submittal.
2. Submittal Number.
3. Title of Project.
4. Name of Contractor and date of his approval.
5. Name of Subcontractor or supplier and date of submittal to Contractor.
6. Reference to Specification section and paragraph and./or Drawing Number(s).
7. The specific location ofthe work covered.
8. Any qualification, departure or deviation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
9. Any additional information required by the Specihcation for the particular
material.
C. "Shop Drawings" include fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings;
manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules, descriptive literature, catalogs and
brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; all other drawings and
descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, duct and conduit systems, and
methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or
systems and the position thereof conform to the Contract requirements. Shop Drawings
shall be ofsufFrcient detail to indicate all conflicts with other Subcontractors.
1. NOTE: Reproduction of drawings by any photographic, xerographic or other
similar technique or process, for incorporating the material contained into a shop
drawing, is strictly prohibited.
2. Architect will fumish at Contractor's request CAD Base Drawings for use in
developing shop drawings
a. Contractor shall be required to sign CAD waiver provided by Architect.
b. Contractor shall be charged handling fee of $250 per sheet payable to
Architect.
3. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad
2004 only. Drawings shall include only doors, walls, windows, and room
numbers.
D. "Product Data" are illustrations. standard schedules. performance charts, instruction,
brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a
material, product or system for some portion of the Work.
E. All material, equipment, etc., indicated on the shop drawings and product data submitted
as furnished by emother Subcontractor shall be so stated with the respective
Subcontractor's name or section of work. Under no circumstances will the term "By
Others" be permitted on the shop drawings.
F. The Contractor shall submit all required shop drawings and product data as received from
each Subcontractor, in accordance with the approved schedules, and in any event, with
such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other Contractor
or Subcontractor. The Architect shall, within l5 calendar days, or such longer period as
may under the circumstances be reasonable, review shop drawings and product data.
l. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittal by architect's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is required allow 21 Calender days for initial
review. Items requiring concurrent review:
a. Doors, frames, and hardware.
b. Elevators.
c. Masonr-v.
d. Louvers.
SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
ARCON 15095 01 33 00 -2
Mechanical equipment curbs.
Precast Concrete.
Architectural items containing electrically operated components
Prior to submission, the Contractor shall thoroughly check all shop drawings and product
data as to measurements, size of members, materials and all other details to satisfy himself
that they conform to the intent ofthe Drawings and Specifications.
By approving and submitting shop drawings and product data, the Contractor thereby
represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, construction
criteria, materials, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop
drawing with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
Ifthe shop drawings or product data show variations from Contract requirements because
of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention
of such variation in his submittal letter. Any such variations are subject to review by the
Architect.
The Architect shall review shop drawings or product data only for conformance with
design intent ofthe project. The Architect's review will not be construed as:
e.
f.
gD'
G.
H.
1.
2.
-1.
Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
Relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for any error in details, dimensions
or otherwise that may exist.
Accepted departures from additional details or instructions previously furnished
by the Architect, unless the Architect has specifically accepted the variation in
accordance with the thirteenth paragraph ofthis article.
K. Subcontractors shall submit to the Architect through the Contractor; four prints of each
drawing, including fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, and such other
drawings as required under the various sections of the Specifications; four copies of
manufacturers'descriptive data for materials, equipment and fixtures, including catalog
sheets, showing dimensions, performance characteristics and capacities, wiring diagrams
and controls, schedules, installation instructions and other pertinent information as
required; all in accordance with the second paragraph ofthis article.
Shop drawings and product data with no corrections will be stamped "CONFORMS
WITH DESIGN CONCEPT", and those requiring only minor corrections will be starnped
"NOTE MARKINGS". Those stamped "CONFORMS WITH DESIGN CONCEPT" can
be used for ordering, fabrication and erection. Those stamped "NOTE MARKINGS"
can also be used for ordering, fabrication, and erection, but the original drawings must be
corrected and new transparencies submitted for final acceptance. Ifdrawings
resubmitted for hnal acceptance have changes other than those previously noted, such
changes must be identified and explained in the letter of transmittal by which the
drawings are submitted.
If major corrections are required, the Architect will return the sepia transparency stamped
"RESUBMIT". The Contractor shall correct the original drawing as required and then
submit new documents to the Architect for approval. The Architect will review the
corrected shop drawing and return sepia transparency to the Contractor until f,rnal
approval has been given.
Shop drawings which do not have the Architect's signature and stamp "CONFORMS
WITH DESIGN CONCEPT", or "NOTE MARKINGS" shall not be permiued ar the sire,
At least one ( I ) complete set of shop drawings bearing the Architect's stamp shall be
SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
L.
M
ARCON 15095
N.
01 33 00 -3
kept at the site, in the Contractor's field office, for reference at all times.
O. No work in the shop or field shall be started until the Architect has approved the shop
drawings and samples for that segment of the work, nor shall work be done from any shop
drawings not bearing the Architect's stamp of approval.
I.O5 SAMPLES
"Samples" are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship
and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
The Contractor shall submit to Architect, samples of all materials, equipment, fixtures,
appiiances and other fittings, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work
or in that of any other contractor or Subcontractor and in accordance with the approved
schedules. The Architect shall, within 15 caiendar days or such ionger period as may be
reasonable, check such samples, but only for conformance with the design concept ofthe
project. The Architect's determination shall be final and binding.
Unless otherwise required in the Specihcations, three (3) samples of sufficient size to
indicate general visual effect shall be submitted to the Architect. Where samples must
show a range of color, texture, finish, graining, or other similar property, submit three (3)
sets of pairs illustrating the fuIl scope of this range. One set of "CONFORMS WITH
DESIGN CONCEPT" samples shall be retained at the Construction Manager's field
office.
SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
A.
B.
C.
D. Samples shall bear the identification specified above in this section.
E. Samples will be accepted by Architect only if all delivery charges are prepaid.
PART 2PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3EXECUTION (Not used)
END OF SECTION 01 33 OO
ARCON 15095 01 33 00 -4
SECTION 02 4I 19
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Demolition requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of
the following:
l. Existing flooring as shown
2. Existing partial height partitions, complete.
3. All existing Casework ( loose and Bult-in)
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction,
protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for building demolition
operations.
3. Division 01 Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structures,
and site improvements.
4. Division 23 Sections for demolishing or relocating site mechanical items.
5. Division 26 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items.
6. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and
below-grade improvements not part of building demolition.
7 . Division 33 for demolishing or relocating site utilities.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence ofoperations for
selective demolition work to Architect for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for
shut-ofi capping and continuation ofutility services as required, together with details for dust
and noise control protection.
I . Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure unintemrpted
progress of Owner's on-site operations.
2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building.
1.03 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Notices: Prior to start of demolition, provide all notices and obtain all permits required by
authorities having jurisdiction. In the event of failure to provide required notice or permits, pay
penalties assessed, including any penalties assessed against the Owner, the Architect. or other
parties.
B. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to
areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition in manner that will minimize need
for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to
Owner of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations.
C. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be
demolished.
ARCON 15095 02 4t t9-l SELECTTIE DEMOLITION
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by
Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by
Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.
D. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed, but of salvable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from
site as they are removed.
1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
E. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms ofprotection required to protect
Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
1. Provide protective measures required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's
personnel and general public to and from occupied portions ofbuilding.
2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities havingjurisdiction.
3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement
or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
4. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed
during demolition operations.
5. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
6. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where required to separate areas
where noisy, dirty or dusty operations are performed. Equip panidons with dustproof
doors and security locks ifrequired.
7. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of
existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation ofnew construction to ensure
that no water leakage or damage occurs to strucrure or interior areas of existing building.8. Remove protections at completion of work.
F. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no
cost to Owner.
G. Trafirc: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference
with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
l. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from authorities havingjurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or
obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
H. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior ofducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable lue suppression devices
during fl ame-cutting operati ons.
I. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect
against damage during demolition operations.
l. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when
authorized in writing by authorities havingjurisdiction. Provide temporary services
during intemrptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
2. Maintain sprinkler service at all times during selective demolition.
J. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods
to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing
ARCON 15095 02 4t t9-2 SELECTTVE DEMOLITION
regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
K. Extermination: Employ a certified exterminator and treat areas of building indicated in
accordance with goveming heaith regulations for rodent and insect control.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to corlmencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be
performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure, surfaces, equipment or to surrounding
properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition. File with
Architect prior to starting work.
3.O2 PREPARATION
A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or
collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
1 Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be
endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for
continuing operations.
B. Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when
demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed.
C. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and closures required to prevent spread of dust or fumes
to occupied portions ofthe building.
1. Where selective demolition occurs irnmediately adjacent to occupied portions of the
building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4 inch studs, 5/8 inch drywall (oints
taped) on occupied side, 1/2 inch fire-retardant piywood on demolition side, and fill
partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation.
2. Provide weatherproof ciosures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work.
D. Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services not indicated to remain.
L Provide by-pass connections necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas
of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shuGdown of
service is necessary during change-over.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. Perform selective demolition in a systematic manner. Use methods required to complete work
indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.
1. Sawcut and demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry
at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools;
do not use power-driven impact tools.
2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to not
ARCON 15095 02 4t t9-3 SELECTI\IE DEMOLITION
impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.
3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
4. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb
adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible.
B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt ofdirective from
Architect, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overalljob progress
without delay.
3.O4 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems intemrptions specified in
Division 01.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility sen'ices and mechanicaVelectrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Contractor shall arrange to shut off indicated services/systems.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
5. Floor slabs may contain pipng or conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for
taking any measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This
includes but is not limited to x-ray or similar non-destructive means.
6. Cut off exterior pipe a minimum of 24 inches (61 0 mm) below grade. Cap, valve, or
plug and seal remaining portion ofpipe or conduit after bypassing.
7. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap offindicated utilities
serving portion(s) of building to be demolished.
8. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively
ARCON 15095 02 4t t9-4 SELECTN,ts DEMOLITION
demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities havingjurisdiction.
3.05 EXAMINATION - ELECTRICAL
C.
Where walls, ceiling, structures, etc., are indicated as being removed on drawings, the
Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all electrical equipment, devices, fixtures,
raceways, wiring, systems, etc., from the removed area.
Where walls ceilings, structures, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others, the
Conffactor shall be responsible for the removal, storage, and replacement of equipment, devices,
fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc.
Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned equipment or facilities.
Extend conduit and wire to facilities and equipment that will remain in operation following
demolition. Extension of conduit and wire to equipment shall be compatible with the
surrounding area.
Coordinate scope of work with all other Contractors and the Owner at the project site. Schedule
removal ofequipment and electrical service to avoid conflicts.
3.06 PREPARATION - ELECTRICAL
E.
Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, structures, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company
Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use
personnnel experienced in such operations. Assume all equipment and systems must remain
operational unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings.
Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and
ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain
permission from Owner at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system.
Minimize outaage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain sen ice in areas adjacent
to work area. Service changeover shall be completed on an overtime basis.
Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted.
Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at
least 48 hours before paritally or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration.
Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. Provide a
watchman to make required premise observations during all outages, requirements as dictated by
Codes and Owner's insurance carrier.
3.O7 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF E)ilSTING ELECTzuCAL WORK
Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 01.
Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
Remove abandoned wiring and raceway to source of supply.
Remove exposed abandoned taceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling
irnishes. Cut raceway flush wiht walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Remove all assocated
clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with raceway removal.
A.
B.
D.
A.
B.
D.
A.
B.
C.
D
ARCON ts09s 02 41 t9-5 SELECTT\'E DEMOLITION
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets ifconduit
servicing them is removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.
Patch openings created from removal of devices to match surrounding finishes.
F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has
been removed.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other
accessories. Ballasts in light fixtures installed prior to 1980 shall be incinerated in EPA
approved incinerator or disposed ofin EPA certified containers and deposited in an EPA landfill
certified for PCB disposal or recycled by permitted ballast recycler. Punctured or leaking
ballasts must be disposed of according to Federal Regulations under the Toxic Substance
Control Act. Provide Owner and Architect/Engineer with Certification of Destruction to verify
their proper disposal.
I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
Patch openings to match existing surrounding finishes.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials an methods compatible with existing electrical
installations or as specified.
L. HID and flourescent lamps, determined by the Toxicity Characteristic I-eachate procedure
(TCLP), to be hazardous waste shall be disposed of in a permitted hazardous waste disposal
facility or by a permitted lamp recycler.
M. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisidction.
N. Floor slabs may contain conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for taking any
measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This includes but is not
************-.,*'*.Ix1111?i;il'.ff*tlHlT.1:.i;i".ti*?J".n".11';-.....x*********,.*,ci.*,k*,<*xxx*****,(**
3.08 SALVAGE MATERIALS
A. Salvage Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage-Deliver to Owner", carefully remove
indicated items, clean, store and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt.
1. Historic artifacts, including cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and
tablets, antiques, and other articles ofhistoric significance remain the property ofthe
Owner. Notify Architect if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regarding
method of removal and salvage for Owner.
3.09 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building
site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site.
1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with
appiicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection
ARCON 15095 02 4t t9-6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
against exposure or environmental pollution.
2. Burning of removed materials in not be permitted on site.
3.IO CLEAN.UP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from
site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return adjacent areas to condition
existing prior to start of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces
soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
3.I1 ELECTRICAL CLEAN-I.IP AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check light tightness ofelectrical connections.
Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide
typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arangement.
C. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior
and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps and broken electrical
parts. Replacement parts shall match specified components for new fixtures of same type when
applicable.
D. Electrical items (e.g., Iighting fixtures, receptacles, switches, conduit, wire, etc.) removed and
not relocated remain the property of the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal
,.**********.....:l*lt:::llllPJini::lXly****************x******************{.:F**,<******
END OF SECTION O 4I 19
ARCON 15095 02 4t t9-7 SELECTTYE DEMOLITION
SECTION 0610 OO
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
l. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Wood furring and sleepers.
3. Plywood backing panels.
I,O2 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB - Southem Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Power-drivenfasteners.
2. Powder-actuatedfasteners.
3. Expansion anchors.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS. GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and apptcable rules of iumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
ARCON 15095 061000-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
l. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade sramp of grading agency.2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural hnish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for
2-inch nominal(38-mm) actual thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber
Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and any of the following
species:
1. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2. Douglas fir-south: WWPA.
3. Douglas firlarch (north); NLGA.
4. Hem-fu: WCLIB or WWPA.
5. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
l. Blocking.
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum
moisture content and any of the following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SpIB.
2. Hem-fr or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or W-W?A.3. spruce-pine-frr (sourh) or Spruce-pine-rrr; NELMA, NLGA, wcLIB, or wwpA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with l5 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SpIB.2. Hem-fir or Hem-frr (north), 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWpA.3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir,2 common grade; NELMA, NLGA, wcLIB,
orWWPA.
2.04 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS l, Exposure l, C-D plugged.
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ll2inch(12.7 mm)
thick.
ARCON 15095 06r000-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.05 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hotdip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A I53lA 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1661.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealingjoints and penetrations in sheathing
and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.
B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498
that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel
manufacfurers.
PART 3 EXECTITION
3.01 INSTALLATION. GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurarc flt.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, sleepers, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table2304.9.1 , "Fastening Schedule," in the Intemational Building Code.
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
3.02 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
ARCON 15095 061000-3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
3.03 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
3.04 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION. GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Do not splice structural members between supports.
3.05 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
apptcations indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
2. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
a. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasreners.
b. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the International Building Code unless
more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings.
3,06 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Remove excess material or waste that cannol be used, as described above, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 0610 OO
ARCON 15095 061000-4 ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 09 21.16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Nonload-bearing steel framing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I.O2 DEFINITIONS
A. Glpsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for glpsum board
assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. ProductData: Foreachtypeofproductindicated.
1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For glpsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings,
provide materials and conshuction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory."
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance
Design Manual."
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, constnrction traffic, and other causes.
Stack glpsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
ARCON 15095 09 2l 16-l GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
l. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Clark Steel Framing Systems.
b. Consolidated Systems, [nc.
c. Dale Industries, lnc. - Dale/Incor.
d. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.
f. National Gypsum Company.
g. Scafco Corporation.
h. Unimast, lnc.
i. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. Certainteed
c. Georgia Pacific Gypsum LLC
d. National Gypsum Company.
e. Trim-tex
f. United States Gypsum Co.
2.02 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64llA 64IM, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch { 1.59 mm)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch 11 .2 1 mm) diameter wire.
C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:
l. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a
qualifi ed independent testing agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
D. Hangers: As follows:
l. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 64llA 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 inch
i4.12 mm) diameter.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
inch (1.37 mm), a minimum ll2 inch ( 12.7 mm) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant zinc coating.
1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
ARCON 15095 09 2t t6-2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLTES
a. Mirdmum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)
b. Depth: 3-518 inches
F. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C635, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
l. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 System.
c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.
2.03 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: As follows:
1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch 10.7 mm).
2. Depth: 3-518 inches 192.1 mm)
C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
g)?sum board applied to interior partitions resulting Aom deflection of structure above; in
thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
l. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Delta Star, lnc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
b. Metal-Lite, lnc.; Slotted Track.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Slotted SLP-TRK.
D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top rurmer manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate
depth of studs.
l. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak.
b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Sloued SLP-TRK.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. MinimumBaseMetalThickness: 0.0312 inch(0.79mm).
F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 inch ( 1.37 mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2
inch ( 12.7 mm) wide flange.
1. Depth: 1-1l2 inches i38.1 mm).
2. Clip Angle: 1-112by 1-l12 inch {38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch (1.73mm) thick,
ARCON 15095 09 2I 16-3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLTES
galvanized steel.
G. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with [ASTM A 653/A 653M,
hot-dip galvatized zinc coating.
l. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
b. Depth: l-1l2 inches(38.1 mm).
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
b. Depth: l-5l8 inches (41.3 mm)
3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, comrgated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare
steel thickness of 0.03 l2 inch 10.79 mm).
4. TieWire: ASTM A641lA64lM,Class 1zinccoating,softtemper,0.0625 inch(1.59
mm) diameter wire, or double shand of 0.0475 inch (1.21 mm) diameter wire.
I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.04 INTEzuOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and ASM Cl396.
l. Type X:
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
c. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 TRIM ACCESSOzuES
A. lnterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
l. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galv atized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receivesjoint compound; use at exposed
panel edges.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
d. Curved-Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved
openings.
B. Aluminum or Plastic Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
l. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
ARCON 15095 09 21164 GYPST]M BOARD ASSEMBLIES
the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. MM Systems Corporation.
d. Pittcon Industries.
e. Trim-tex
2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 474.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper or Fiberglass Tape: Nominal 2 inches wide self
adhering tape
2. Cementitious Backer Units: Alkali-resistant Fiberglass Tape: Nominal 2 inches wide
polyrner coated alkali-resistant mesh tape.
C. Joint Compound for lnterior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats and with gypsum
board rype.
l. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat onjoints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-fype, all-purpose compound.
3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-t)?e, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.07 ALTXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002. unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, l/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: See Division 07 Section "Insulation"
ARCON 15095 09 21 16-s GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings
and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in
advance oftime needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials.
Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building
structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of g)psum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. InstallationStandards: ASTMCT54,ardASTMC840requirementsthatapplytoframing
installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixfures, equipment selices, hear,y trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with glpsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's
"Gypsum Construction Handbook. "
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer ofloading
imposed by structural movement.
L Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
2. Isolate partition framing and walI furring where it abuts structure, except at floor.
3. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and
laterally support assembly.
a. Use deepJeg deflection track where indicated.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides ofjoints independently.
3.04 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING SOFFIT FRAMING
ARCON 15095 09 2t t6-6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1.Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Secure rod or angie hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
C.
a. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
b. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
c. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for
panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in L2 feet 13 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on
each member and transversely between parallel members.
Sway-brace suspended steel fiaming with hangers used for support.
Wire-tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies
indicated.
Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
1. Hangers: 48 inches {1219 mm) o.c. unless more stringent spacing is indicated on
drawings.
2. carrying channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. unless more stringent
spacing is indicated on drawings.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches 1406 mm) o.c. unless more stringent
spacing is indicated on drawings.
Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
3.05 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where glpsum board
assemblies abut other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket
isoiation strip between studs and wall.
2.
J.
4.
B.
D.
E.
B.
ARCON 15095
lnstallation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary
09 2t t6-7 GYPSL'M BOARD ASSEMBLIES
not more than l/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
I . Cut studs l/2 inch ( I 3 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of
floor/roofslabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated
Install steel studs and firning at the following spacings:
L Single-Layer Construction: l6 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Construction: l6 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel
can be attached to open (unsupported) edges ofstud flanges first.
Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to
jamb studs.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Extendjamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside offloor or roof
structwe above.
Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
3.06 APPLYING FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing g)psum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting endjoints in the central area ofeach ceiling. Stagger abutting endjoints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1116 inch 11.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into
place.
Locate edge and endjoints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or g)psum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not piace tapered
edgesagainstcutedgesorends. Staggerverticaljointsonoppositesidesofpartitions. Donot
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
C
D
E.
G.
A.
C
D
E.
ARCON 15095 09 21 16-8 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
F.
G.
H.
Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges ofstud flanges first.
Form control and expansionjoints with space between edges ofadjoining gypsum panels.
Cover both faces ofsteel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced intemally.
L Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concretejoists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1i4 to 3/8 inch
16.4 to 9.5 mm) wide joints to install sealant.
Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing glpsum board partitions at structural abutnaents, except
floors. Provide ll4 to 112 nch {6.4 to 12.7 mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges
with U-bead edge trim where edges of glpsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges
and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead ofacoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and tl-rough penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off
sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions
above acoustical ceilings.
space fasteners in glpsum panels according to referenced glpsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of l2 inches {304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
3.07 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
Single-Layer Application:
l. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.2. On partitionsiwalls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
ofboard.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install paneis horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply g)?sum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with baseJayer joints,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Staggerjoints on
opposite sides of partitions.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
K.
A.
C.
ARCON 15095 09 2l t6-9 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, frrring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
3.08 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSOzuES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufachrer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.09 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare g)psum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residualjoint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill openjoints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over g)?sum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Glpsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
l. Level l: Embed tape atjoints in ceiling plenum axeas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level offinish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies
and sound-rated assemblies.
2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats ofjoint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.10 FrELD QUATTTY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs g).psum board ceilings, Architect will
conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
proceed with installation of glpsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have
been corrected.
1 . Notifu Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project,
will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive glpsum board
ceilings:
a. lnstallation of80 percent oflighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.c. Installationofair-ductsystenrs.
d. Installation ofair devices.
e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
ARCON 15095 09 2l l6-10 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
END OF SECTION O9 2I 16
ARCON 15095 09 2I 16-II GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLTES
SECTION 09 50 OO
CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type acoustical ceiling is indicated on drawings and./or drawing schedules.
B. This Section includes the following:
1 . Patching of existing suspended ceiling system.
C. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
2. Division 09 Section "Glpsum Board Assemblies" for site built g)apsum board ceilings and
clouds.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
I . ASTM A 641 : Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. ASTM P2211F221illd: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. ASTM C423: Standard Test for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficient by
the Reverberation Room Method.
4. ASTM C635 : Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspended Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings.
5. ASTM C636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panels.
6. ASTM E1264: Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
7. ASTM 81414: Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms
Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.
1.03 SIIBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for acoustical ceiling unit and suspension
system required.
B. Submit samples of available colors and finish for radial trim. Once trim color has been chosen,
submit 12 ir,ch sample with approved color and finish applied to actual rim profile. Submit
shop drawings indicating layout arrangement, installation layout and details, and manufacturers
data.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against
damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
ARCON T5095 09 50 OO-1 CEILINGS
moisture content.
C. Handie acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.07 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products
installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.
B. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Fumish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0oA of each type of
amount installed.
C. Color, textures, and pattems: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, surface
textures, and pattems available for acoustical ceiling units and exposed metal suspension system
members of quality designated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to those indicated for each designation in the
acoustical panel ceiling schedule at the end ofPart 3.
2.02 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS. GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: provide metal suspension systems of type, structural
classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated int the
Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
1. Baked enamel white finish for acoustical panel system. Heads of pop rivets to match
color ofgrid.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table I, Direct
Hung.
D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1
coating, sized so that stress at 3-times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung),
will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage.
ARCON 15095 09 50 00-2 CEILINGS
E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penekations that fit acoustical panel edge
details and suspension systems indicted; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension systems rutners.
L For circular peneffations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetrations exactly.
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal
ofsame depth and width as that formed between edge ofpanel and flange at exposed
suspension member.
F. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's
extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profiie indicated or referenced by manufacturer's
product designations, including splice plates, comer pieces, and attachment and other clips,
complying with the following requirements:
1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for
type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durabilify
properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 22llB 22M for ailoy and
temper 6063-T5.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum
Association for desi gnating aluminum fi nishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by
other trades for support ofacoustical ceilings.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges ofeach ceiling. Avoid use ofless-than-halfwidth panel at borders.
3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply
with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and CISCA
standards applicable to work.
B. Install tiie with pattern to align with light fixture layout.
C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from
building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6 inches fiom each end ofspaced 4'-
0" along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to
tolerance of l/8 inch in 12'-0".
D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-
screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for subskate, and which will not
deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. Do not attach to ductwork, conduit, piping,
or any other mechanical/electrical item.
E. lnstall hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing,
countersplaying or other equally effective means.
F. lnstall edge moldings or tlpe indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations
ARCON 15095 09 s0 00-3 CEILINGS
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
G. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inch o.c. and not more than 3 inch
from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0". Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
H. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
I. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
mnners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a near,
precise fit.
J. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities havingjurisdiction,
and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommend by panel manufacture's written insfuctions,
unless otherwise indicated or required.
K. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by
support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at
penetrations.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
ARCON 15095 09 s0 00-4 CEILINGS
A.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE PANEL TYPE ATl
Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type AT1:
1. Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels complying with the following:
a. Fine Fissured; Armstrong Industries, Inc.
b. Fine Fissured; Certainteed
c. Radar Climaplus; USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Srze:24 by 48 inches (610 by 610 mm).
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
4. Edge Detail: Square.
5. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2,
water felted.
6. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation (description) as specified by product
designation.
1. Color: White.
8. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.80.
9. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55 in compliance with ASTM C423.10. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 35 in compliance with ASTM 81414.
1 1. Dimensional Stability: Humidity resistant performance and intercept antimicrobial solution on
front and back.
12. Warranty: Warranty period 10 years after date of substantial completion for acoustical panels and
grid system.
Suspension System for this ceiling type:
1. Provide one of the following:
a. Prelude XL; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. 15/16" Classic Hook; CertainTeed.
c. 1200 System/211-219 Main Tee; Chicago Metallic Corporationd. DX,/DXL; USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners ro11 formed
from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolystically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized
accordingtoASTM A6531A653M,G01 (2001)coatingdesignation,withprefinishedl5/16-inch-
(24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges, other characteristics as follows:
a. Structural Classification: Hear,y duty system.
b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.c. Face Design: Flush face.
d. Cap Material: Steel sheet.
e. Cap Finish: Painted white.
END OF SECTION 09 50 OO
B.
ARCON 15095 09 50 00-s CEILINGS
SECTION 09 65 OO
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
l. Rubber floor tile
2. Vinyl Wall Base
3. Resilient molding accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.2. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition"
3. Division 09 Section "Carpet Tile"
I.O2 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single
manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of resilient flooring and
accessory.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts in form of
actual sections ofresilient flooring, including accessories, showing full range ofcolors and
patterns available, for each rype of resilient flooring required.
C. Manufacturer's current installation instructions
D. Moisture Suppression Membrane: Manufacturer's warranty registration with concrete subfloor
moisture test results and building ambient air temperature and relative humidity test results.
E. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
1.04 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F
113 deg C) or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time
periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
ARCON 15095 09 6s 00-1 RESILIENT FLOORING
1.05
D. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been
cured and are sufftciently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's
recommended bond and moisture test.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
F. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F { 13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F35 deg.
MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner.
B. Floor Tile: Furnish I box for every 25 boxes or fraction thereot of each Qpe, color, color run,
and pattem of floor tile installed. Fumish maintenance materials from same manufachred lot as
materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with identifying labels indicating
building location ofeach color, texture and clor run..
C. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Fumish not less thau l0 linear feet (3 linear m) for every
250 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each f5,pe, color, pattem, and size of
resilient product installed.
PRODUCTS
RESILIENT COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Provide color and patterns as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
RUBBER FLOOR TrLE (RT-t)
A. Resilient Rubber Tile Flooring with the following physical characteristics:
1. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor
Tiie, Class 1-A and l-B.
Manufactured from a homogeneous composition of 100% synthetic rubber.
Overall thickness: 1/8".
Tile Size: 18"x18" or 24"y24"
Tile Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's range of options for this
product.
ASTM D 2240 standard rest Method for Rubber property-Durometer Hardness: 65
Shore A.
ASTM D 3389 Standard rest Method for coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance: < 1.00
gram weight loss.
ASTM D 2047 , Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated
Flooring: Exceeds Federal Standards and A.D.A. requirements for slip-resistant.
ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit - passes at 250 pSI.
ASTM E 989, Standard classification for Rating Impact [nsulation (IIC) using ASTM E
492, Acoustical Measurement of Impact Sound rransmission Through Floor-ceiling
Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine - 40 IIC.
ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
using a Radiant Heat Energy Source - equal to or greater than 0.45 watts/cm2.
Phthalate, chlorine and halogen-free.
B. Available Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
PART 2
2.01
2.02
ARCON 15095 09 65 00-2 RESILIENT FLOORING
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems
4. Roppe
5. Mondo
2.03 VINYL WALL BASE
A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SS-W-40, Tlpe II, with matching end
stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows:
l. Height: 4 inch.
2. Length: 120 foot rolls.
3. Thickness: l/8 inch gage.
4. Style: Standard top-set cove.
5. Finish: Matte.
6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color palette.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products rnhich may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the follou,ing:
1. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems, Inc.
4. Roppe
5. VPI
2.04 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacfurers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems, Inc.
4. Roppe
5. VPI
B. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8 inch thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or
bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors
available; not less than I inch wide. Install at all changes in floor material.
C. ADA/IAC compliant Glue down vinyl moldings (as below or as indicated on drawings):
1. Transition/Adaptormoldings:
a. For transition between resilient tile and carpet
b. For transition between resilient tile and porcelain, ceramic or other tilec. For transition between ceramic tile and carpet
d. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete
2. Reducer moldings/Edge guard moldings:
a. For transition between resilient tile and exposed concrete.b. For transition befween ceramic tile and exposed concrete
c. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
ARCON 15095 09 65 00-3 RESILIENT FLOORING
A. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to
suit material and substrate conditions.
B. Concrete SIab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory
subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings
preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance.
B. Inform the Architect if any of the following conditions are found:
L Cracks in the subfloor exceed ll4 inch in width.
2. Differential settlement exceeding l/8 inch has occurred across a crack.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verifu internal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2170.
l. Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in
accordance with manufacturer's warranty registration.
2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exceed 95oh.
B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently
cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence ofcuring compounds.
C. Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
D. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows:
l. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including
curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives. paint. oils, waxes and
sealers.
2. The floor surface must be sound, solid, clean and free ofdebris, dust and any other
particles.
3. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer.
4. For smoothing in ridges, filling cracks to a smooth finish, and leveling areas up to l/8
inch thick, or as required to filljoints, etc., provide and install SD-F Feather Finish, as by
ARDEX, Inc., per manufacturer's instructions. This product is trowelable and does not
require a primer, but the floor surface must be sound, solid, clean, and free of debris, dust
and any other particles. This work is to be expected in all rooms and shall be part of the
Base Bid.
5. For any existing flooring depressions over 1/8 inch thick, provide and install ARDEX K-
15 self-leveling underlay,rnent, or equivalent, as per manufacturer's instructions, after
priming existing floor with ARDEX P-51 primer, diluted I : I with water. Again, the floor
surface must be sound, solid, clean and free of debris, dust and any other particles. After
installation of the non-trowelable ARDEX K-15, use the SD-F Feather Finish to smooth
any edges which may not feather down to the existing floor.
6. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor.7. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
application of adhesive. Apply in compiiance with manufachrer's directions.
ARCON 15095 09 65 00-4 RESILIENT FLOORING
3.03 RESILIENT FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and
similar openings.
2. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, builrin furniture and cabinets,
pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions.
3. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering atjoints, telegraphing ofadhesive spreader marks, or other surface
imperfections. Hand ro11 resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure
adhesion.
4. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
that tile at opposite edges ofroom are ofequal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of
cut widths less than l12 tlle at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unJess
otherwise shown.
5. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
6. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
7. Lay tile in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles.
8. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with
fl ooring manufacturer's directions.
9. Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives.
10. Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not
tear, rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair
damaged areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring
installation. Provide continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire
designated floor area.
1 1. Adhere resilient tile directly to moisture suppression membrane using tile manufacturer's
recommended water based adhesive.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Apply wall base to walls, colurnns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or
areas where base is required. lnstall base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner
units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base
to substrate throughout length ofeach piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical
surfaces.
B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. lnstall edging
strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed.
C. Fully adhere rubber stair tread units to stair tread substrate throughout length of tread. Provide
additional securement at nosing of rubber stair tread unit as required.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
D. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring:
l. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly.
2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has
ARCON T5095 09 65 OO-5 RESILIENT FLOORING
elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive.
3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil.
4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface biemishes, using appropriate cleaner
recommended by resilient fl ooring manufacturers.
5. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient
flooring manufacturer's directions.
END OF SECTION 09 65 OO
ARCON 15095 09 65 00-6 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09 68 TO
CARPET TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
l. Carpet Tile.
2. Accessories
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 07, Section "Surface Applied Vapor Reduction System" for moisture mitigation
system.
3. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet.
C. ReEntry Specification Scope of Work (Owner required recycling of existing carpet)
L Owner specifies that existing carpet and existing carpet waste be recycled in the best
possible manner. A reclamation plan will be submitted that will provide directions for
the reclamation of recyclable carpet at the job site. "Environmentally friendly" carpet
recycling methods should be performed subsequent to job completion. In this case,
"environmentally friendly" methods consists of either:
a. Recycling is turning waste materials into new materials of the same value, such as
vinyl backing into vinyl backing.
b. Upcycling involves turning waste materials into more valuable products. For
example, using waste PET (plastic from soda bottles) to create Terratex fabric.c. Downcycling creates less valuable products from waste materials. Turning nylon
face fiber into car parts or carpet padding, including nylon face fiber in recycled
backings, or using carpet for waste-to-energy are good examples of downcycling.d. Repurposing allows a product to be reused by an organization or individual.e. Interface assist in facilitating the donation ofused carpeting to charities and other
non-profit organizations.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each rype of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on all
physical characteristics specified in this section. Include installation recommendations for each
type of substrate required.
B. Preinstallation: Check list prior to installation of carpet.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
l. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
2. Existing flooring materials to be removed.
3. Existing flooring materials to remain.
4. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
ARCON 15095 09 68 10-t CARPET TILE
5. Locations where dye lot changes occur.
6. Seamlayout:
a. Seam location, types and methods.
b. Seams run length the length of the area.
c. Main traffic runs long, rather than across, the seam.
d. lncident light does not strike across the seam.
e. Seams are away from areas subject to pivoting traffic.
f. Seams are not perpendicular to doorway openings.
7. Pattern t)?e, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
8. Pile direction.
9. Type, color, and location ofinsets and borders.
10. Type, color, and location ofedge, transition, and other accessory strips.
1 1. Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
irdicated on Drawings and in schedules.
l. Carpet: 12 inch t300 mm) square Sample.
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12 inch t300 mm) long Samples.
3. Carpet Seam: 6 inch t 150 mm) Sample.
E. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
F. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
Include the following:
l. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Flooring contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation including floor preparation.
The carpet installed in accordance with "Installation fo Commercial Carpet" CRl-104.
C. Carpet manufacturer shall provide field service experts to assist in the project startup.
Manufacturer shall notifl,, in writing, Architect, General Contractor, and Owner if any
installation instructions are not followed.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
B. All materials shall be delivered no earlier than 48 hours prior to start of installation.
I.O5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
ARCON 15095 09 68 1O-2 CARPET TILE
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperahre and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
L Relative humidity 35-55 percent.
2. Ambient air temperature between 65 degrees F. and 75 degrees F.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by catpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet, at no cost to Owner, that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified
warranfy period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, delamination, tuft bind, and
moisture penetration.
l. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.
I.O7 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
l. Carpet: Tiles equal to 5 percent ofamount installed for each type indicated, but not less
than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq.m).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CARPET TrLE (CPT-l)
Carpet material shall be exactly what is shown and described on drawngs.
A. Physical Characteristics:
1. Face Construction: Patterned Loop.
2. Gauge: 5164 inch.
3. Stitches: 11.3 per inch.
4. Pile Height: 0. 187 inches for finished carpet per ASTM D 4l 8.
5. Surface Pile Weight: 35.5 oz./sq. yd.
6. Density: Not less than 7,000 (as calculated by face weight x 36 divided by pile).
7. Primary Backing: Fiberglass Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Vinyl Cushion.
8. Secondary Backing: LTP, UPS, or Unibond.
9. Width: 24" x24" Modular Tile.
ARCON 15095 09 68 10-3 CARPET TILE
B. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
l. Static Generation: Not more than 3.0 Kv per AATCC-I34
2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646.
3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC-I65.
4. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) per
AATCC-16.
5. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria;
not less than I -mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per
AATCC-I74.
6. Flammability: Pass DOC-FF-I-70 Pill test and meets NFPA Class I per ASTM E-648
glue down.
7 . Smoke: Not more than 450 flaming mode per NFPA 258 NBS Smoke chamber.
8. Stain Resistance: Meets GSA requirements for AATCC 175.
9. Tuft Bind: 20 lbs. average wet or dry per ASTM D-1335.
10. Moisture penetration: Lifetime per Dow Modified Spill Test Method E (Part 2) and
moisture vapor Transmission Per ASTM E96.
C. AdhesiveSystemCharacteristics:
l. Carpet: Securely attached to the floor in compliance with American With Disabilities Act
- Section 4.5.3
2. Product shall be installed in accordance with Standard For Installation of Commercial
Carpet CRl-104.
3. Floor Adhesive: Low VOC, wet set adhesive. Adhesive shall be approved and supplied
by carpet manufacturer.
4. Adhesives shall have lifetime product performance warranty.
2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpetmanufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that
is provided by the following:
1. Carpetmanufacturer.
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
D. Transition Strips: Provide and install "metal edge" transition stip as by Tandus Centiva. This
strip will have to be modified to allow it to follow the curved transition between the carpet tile
and the LVT in the library. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
ARCON 15095 09 68 IO-4 CARPET TILE
performance. Verifu that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
l. Usemanufacturer'spreinstallationchecklist.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
Inform the Architect if any of the following conditions are found:
1. Cracks in the subfloor exceed ll4 inch in width.
2. Differential settlement exceeding l/8 inch has occurred across a crack.
Verifu internal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2170.
l. Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in
accordance with manufacturer' s warranty registrati on.
2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exceedg5o/o.
Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufiiciently
cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence ofcuring compounds.
Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
General; Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet installation.
Subfloor preparation shall meet all conditions as specified in the manufacturer's installation
handbook instructions.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Skim coat the entire existing
floor slab to meet carpet manufacturers requirements.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:
l. Carpetmanufacturer.
I. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 MOISTURE SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install moisture suppression membrane with smooth film side facing concrete slab.
B. Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's current written installation instructions.
C. If any job site condition interferes with compliance with manufacturer's instructions, contact
manufacturer and obtain written job specific procedures. Notif, Architect describing the job site
condition and manufacturer's job specific instructions.
A.
B.
C
D
E.
F.
G.
H.
ARCON 15095 09 68 r0-s CARPET TILE
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives.
B. Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not tear,
rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair damaged
areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring installation. Provide
continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire designated floor area.
C. Adhere carpet directly to moisture suppression membrane using carpet manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
D. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down
lnstallation."
1. Use trowel 1/8" x 1/8" x 1116" for adhesive application.
E. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs."
F. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
the door in closed position.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
H. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in fumiture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
I. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 6810
ARCON T5095 09 68 10-6 CARPET TILE
SECTION 09 90 OO
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the follou'ing:
l. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item
or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether
or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect
will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting ofexposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment.
D. Work under this contract includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:
I. High pressure washing and abrasive blasting in accordance with the requirements of .
2. Surface preparation ofsubstrates as required for acceptance ofpainting including
cleaning, small crack repair, patching and making good surfaces and areas to the limits
defined under MPI preparation requirements
3. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation in
accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer's requirements
4. Specific pre-treatments noted in this section or specified in the MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual.
5. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other sections of work)
and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel
equipment.
6. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted in this section or specified in the
MPI architectural Painting Specifi cation Manual.
7 . Painting of all semi-concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind
grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).
8. Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e.
doors and door frames) unless pre-finished.
9 . Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
equipment, (e.g. ducts, sprinkler piping, etc.) and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
Schedule unless pre-finished.
1 0. Re-painting of existing surfaces and finishes when adjacent to new painting work where
applicable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in accordance with MPI
Repainting req uirements.
I 1. Provision ofsafe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary
ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and/or volatile / flammable materials are being
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-1 PAINTING
used.
E. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Acoustical wall panels.
c. Metal toilet enclosures.
d. Metal lockers.
e. Elevator entrance doors and frames.
f. Elevator equipment.
g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
h. Light fixtures.
i. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
c. Ceiling plenums.
d. Utility tunnels.
e. Pipe spaces.
f. Duct shafts.
C. Elevator shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
F. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.2. Division 02 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving"
3. Division 02 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving"
4. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel"
5. Division 05 Section "Steel Joists"
6. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications"
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-2 PAINTING
r.02
7. Division 08 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"
8. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"
9. Division 09 Section "Wood Gymnasium Flooring"
10. Divisions 23 and26:- Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions
23 and 26, respectively.
REFERENCES
A. The latest edition of the following reference standards shall govem all painting work:
l. Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI)
including identifiers, evaluation, systems, preparation and approved product list.
(Hereafter referred to as MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited
Quality Assurance Association having junsdicition.
2. Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound of Consumer Products,
Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers
1. Material List:
i.03
a.
b.
Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials.
lndicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and
application.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Finish Schedule of indicating room name, room number, product, manufacturer,
sheen, and associated MPI System
d.
B.
C.
Manufacturer's Information :
Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for
use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products fumished are in accordance with VOC
Content limits and other requirements of State of Illinois Title 35 (Section 223).
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
l. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples ofthe actual substrate.
l. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each
sample for location and application.
3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture
only:
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-3 PAINTING
a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 inch (300 mm) square samples of each color and
material on hardboard.
b. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 by 8 inch ( 100 by 200 mm) samples of
natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses ofarchitects and owners, and other information
specified.
E. Submit a finish schedule of all painting materials indicating room name, room number, product
F. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint tlpe and color
coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance.
G. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory expserience and shall show
proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
throughout the duration of the work.
B. Qualified joumeypersons, as defined by local jurisdiction shall be engaged in painting and
decorating work. Apprentices may be eomployed provided they work under the direct
supervision of a qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations.
C. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of the latest edition
of the MPI Painting Manual
D. A1l paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
section of the MPI Painting Manual.
E. The painting contractor shall receive written confirmation of the specific surface preparation
procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator/supplier to
ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before
painting any such work.
F. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by
applicable authorities havingjurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding,
ventilation, etc.)
2. Conform to requirements oflocal authorities havingjurisdiction in regard to the storage,
mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials.
3. Notifu the Paint Inspection Agency on award of contract and make application for
assignment of an Inspector using appropriate forms supplied by the Agency as well as
provide a copy ofthe project painting specification, drawings, color schedule and list of
proposed materials for review purposes prior to commencement of work.
4. Fully cooperate at all times with the requirements of the Paint Inspection Agency in the
performance oftheir duties, including providing access and assistance as required to
complete inspection work.
G. Mock-Ups: When requested by the Architect, provide duplicate 12" square samples of surfaces
or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors, gloss / sheen
and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval. When
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-4 PAI]\'TING
approved, samples shall become acceptable standard ofquality for appropriate on site surface
with one of each sample retained on site.
1.05 QUALITYASSLIRANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting
system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record
of successful in-service performance.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
A.
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
t.
8.
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type)
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
fireproofstorage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no
smoking) as required.
Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers
and removed from the site on a daily basis.
Waste Management and Disposal:
-).
Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.)
are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain
information on these controls from applicable State and Local govemment departments
having jurisdiction.
All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available,
collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.
Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an
appropriate manner.
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.
To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems
C
D.
E.
1.
4.
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-5 PAIN'TING
or into the gound the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:
a. Retain cleaning water for water based materials to allow sediments to be filtered
out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.
b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated
containers and ensure proper disposal.
c. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant
recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.
d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with
hazardous waste regulations.
e. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).
f. Close and seal tightlypartly used cans ofmaterials including sealant and adhesive
containers and store protected in well ventilated fire safe area at moderate
temperature.
g. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by
the Owner and deliver or arange collection for verifiable re-use or re-
manufacturing.
I.O7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F {7.2 nd 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mis! or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
l. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.08 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production nrn as the materials applied in the
quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for
storage and identifu with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
1. Quantity: Fumish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below:
a. Quantity: Fumish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than I gal.
(3.785 L) or I case, as appropriate, ofeach material and color applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
l. Benjamin Moore & Co' (Moore).
2. PPG Architectwal Coatings (PPG).
3. Pratt & Lambert (PNL)
4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (SW).
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-6 PAINTING
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, etc.) listed in the
Iatest edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project.
All such material shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
B. Other materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents, etc. shall be the highest quality
product of an MPI listed manufacturer and shall be compatible with paint materials being used
as required.
C. All materials used shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where
possible.
D. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of
blemishes, sags. air entrapment, etc.
E. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings
designated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 MIXING AND TINTING
A. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
l. Tinted primers are not acceptable.
B. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
D. If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's
instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer
and provide copy ofinstructions to Architect.
2.04 FINISH AND COLORS
A. Unless otheru,ise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI Custom
Grade finish requirements.
B. Colors shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer's full range of colors. Refer to
Finish Schedule and drawings for identification and location ofcolors.
C. Exterior colors will be based on three (3) base colors and two (2) accent colors with a maximum
of one ( I ) deep or bright color. No more than six (6) colors will be selected for the entire
project. Note that this does not include pre-finished items by others, e.g. flashings, aluminum or
vinyl windows, aluminum doors, etc.
D. lnterior colors will be based on four (4) base colors and two (2) accent colors with a maximum
of one ( I ) deep or bright color. No more than seven (7) colors witl be selected for the entire
project and no more than three (3) colors will be selected in each area. Note that this does not
include pre-finished items by others (e.g. aluminum or vinyl windows, aluminum doors and
handrails, gymnasium fl ooring)
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-7 PAINTING
E. Interior colors and/or pattems shall be consistent throughout wrth two (2) separate schemes
prepared.
F. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
G. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted white.
H. Corridors shall be painted the same color on all floors with lwo (2) separate color schemes
prepared for doors and trim.
I. Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color than
typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of trvo (2)
colors required.
J. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, interior walls and ceiling surfaces
shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria over appropriate prime / sealer coat:
1. All areas (except as noted): washable latex with G3 (eggshell) finish.
2. Laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and
bathrooms: washable latex with G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
3. Public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower rooms:
epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for wet surfaces.
4. Public and institutional facility "clean" or "sanitary" areas such as food preparation and
laboratory areas: epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for dry surfaces.
K. Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color
than either. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all doors, frames and trim shall be painted
using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
L. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, exit and vestibule doors shall be painted a
contrasting color to walls and a different color than any other door in the same area.
M. Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g. door closers), registers,
radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacent
surfaces (i.e. same color, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where pre-finished.
N. Plywood service panels (e.g. electrical, telephone and cable vision panels) including edges shall
be back-primed and painted to match painted wall mounted on.
O. The inside of light valances shall be painted gloss white.
P. The inside of all duct work behind louvers, grills and diffusers for a minimum of 460 mm (18")
or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, shall be painted using flat black (non-reflecting) paint.
2.05 GLOSS AND SHEEN RATINGS
A. Gloss / Sheen Ratings:
1. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating ofapplied paint, in accordance with the
following MPI values:
Gloss Level Description Units at 60 degrees Units at 85 degrees
GI Matte or FIat finish 0to5 l0 max.
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-8 PAINTING
G2 Velvet finish 0to 10 l0 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 35 min.
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to 85
G7 High-Gloss finish >85
2. Gloss level ratings ofall painted surfaces shall be as specified and as noted on Finish
Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Condition of Swfaces:
A. Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine (and test as required) all
conditions and surfaces scheduled to be painted and report in writing to the Contractor and
Architect any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work ofthis section.
B. No painting work shall commence until all such adverse conditions and defects have been
corrected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Painting contractor.
C. Commencement of work shall not be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except as qualified
herein. Such surfaces as concrete, masonry, structural steel and miscellaneous metal, wood,
glpsum board and plaster, shall not be the responsibility of the Painting contractor.
D. The Painting contractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate or for
correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate which may adversely affect the painting work
except for minimal work normally performed by the Painting contractor and as indicated.
Painting Subcontractor shall assure that surfaces are properly prepared before any paint or
coating is applied.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Preparation of Surfaces:
l. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to the MPI Painting
Manual in regard to specific requirements for the following:
a. environmental conditions.
b. pH testing.
c. rust stain removal.
d. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces.
e. clay and concrete masonry units.
f. structurai steel and miscellaneous metals.
C. steel exposed to high heat.
h. galvanized and zinc coated metal.
i. dimension and dressed lumber.j wood decks, floors, stairs and steps.
k. stucco, plaster and glpsum board.
l. canvas and cotton coverings.
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-9 PAINTING
2.
J.
3.03 APPLICATION
4.
Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination,
ventilation and temperature requirements.
Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings / fastenings
(e.g. electrical plates, mechanical louvers, door and window hardware (e.g. hinges, knobs,
locks, trim, frame stops), removable rating lhazard linstruction labels, washroom
accessories, light fixture trim, etc. from wall and ceiling surfaces, doors and frames, prior
to painting. Carefully clean and replace all such items upon completion of painting work
in each area. Do not use solvent or reactive cleaning agents on items that will mar or
remove finishes (e.g. lacquer finishes). Doors shall be removed before painting to paint
bottom and top edges and then re-hung.
Protect all adjacent interior surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on
doors, frames, equipment, piping, etc., from painting operations and damage with drop
cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any
damage caused by failure to provide such protection.
Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly
after the first coat ofpaint. Start offinish painting ofdefective surfaces (e.g. glpsum
board) shall indicate acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall
be borne by the painter including re-painting of entire defective surface (no touch-up
painting).
confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items. Refer to euality
Assurance.
6.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and./or until all environmental conditions (heating,
ventilation, Iighting and completion of other subtrade work) are acceptable for applications of
products.
Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual premium Grade finish
requirements.
Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint
specifications require earlier applications.
Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Tint each coat ofpaint progressively lighter to enable confirmation ofnumber ofcoats.
l. Tinted primers are not acceptable.
Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, apply a minimum of four coats of paint where deep
or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39").
Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not suffrciently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions
state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficientiy dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
Prime coat of stain or vamish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
E.
G.
H.
J.
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-10 PAINTING
3.04 INTERIOR PAINT AND COATING SYSTEMS
A. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements:
l. Concrete Vertical Surfaces (including horizontal soffits):
a. INT 3.1A (MPI52): Latex G3 finish (overprimer).
b. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex
2. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces (floors and stairs):
a. INT 3.2G (MPI 127); Concrete floor sealer, water based finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW ArmorSeal Tread-Plex
3. Clay Masonry Units (pressed and extruded brick and only where indicated on room finish
schedule):
a. INT 4.1A (MPI 144): Latex G3 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex
4. Concrete Masonry Units (does not include ground and split face block and brick):
a. iNT 4.2A (MPI 52): Latex finish over block frller - G3 finish.
b. The application ofwater repellent or clear finishes shall be done by others per
Division 04 Section "Masonry Assemblies"
c. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex
5. Stmctural Steel and Metal Fabrications (beams, joists, and deck):
a. INT 5. 1C (MPl 226): Water based dry fall finish - G5 frnish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro lndustrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall
6. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications (columns, beams, joists, etc.):
a. INT 5.1Q (MPI 141): Pre catalyzed acrylic epoxy - G5 finish
b. Basis-of-Design Product: Pro Industrial Pre-catalyzed Waterbased Expoxy
7. Galvanized Metal (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts,
etc.):
a. INT 5.3A (MPI l4l ): Pre-catalyzed acrylic epoxy - G5 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: Pro lndustrial Pre-catalyzed Waterbased Expoxy
8. Stained Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking. etc.):
a. INT 6.2J (MPI 57): Varnish Interior, Polyurethane, Oil Modified over stain - G4
finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW-Minwax Wood Classics Pol)'urethane Vamish
9. Stained Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings, and running trim):
a. INT 6.38 (MPI 129): Water based clear polyurethane varnish over stain - G5
finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW-Minwax Water Based Polyurethane Varnish
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-r l PAINTING
10. Painted Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.):
a. INT 6.2D: Latex G3 finish (over latex primer).
b. Basis-olDesign Product: SW Pro industrial Acrylic B66-660 series
I l. Painted Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings and running trim):
a. INT 6.3A: High performance architectural latex - G5 finish
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss B66 series
12. Plaster and Gypsum Board (gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type material", etc.,
and textured finishes):
a. INT 9.2A (MPI laa): Latex G3 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex
13. Painting of interior game line layouts with colors as noted on approved game line layout
drawing on gymnasium flooring to be by others.
3.05 MECHANICAL, ELECTzuCAL EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SUMACES
A. Unless otheru,ise specified or noted, paint all "unfinished" conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork
and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces,
in the following areas:
l. Where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas.
2. ln all interior high humidity interior areas.
3. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
B. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
C. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment wrth paint as supplied
by manufacturer of equipment.
D. Do not paint over nameplates.
E. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a
minimum of 460 mm (18") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat
of matt black (non-reflecting) paint.
F. Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
G. Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
H. Paint red or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical
specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
L Paint yellou,or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
requirements.
J. Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
equipment before installation to match adjacent wall surface. Leave equipment in original finish
except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished
items.
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-12 PAINTING
K. Paint exterior steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
equipment.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTANCE
A. Al surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
B. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness ifany
of the following defects are apparent to the Owner or Architect:
1. Brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, hear,y stippling, hiding or shadowing
by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in paint
coatings.
2. Evidence ofpoor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lapjoints, crevices, pockets,
comers and re-entrant angles.
3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the
weather.
5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.).
C. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable ifany ofthe following are evident under
naturai iighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylighQ for
interior surfaces:
l. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance ofnot less than 1000 mm (39").
2. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at norrnal viewing angles
from a distance ofnot less than 1000 mm (39").
3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at
normal viewing angles.
4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture,
and hiding across full surface area.
D. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense ofthe Contractor.
Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film
thickness ofpaint shall be repainted. Runs, sags ofdamaged paint shall be removed by scraper
or by sanding prior to application of paint.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect all exterior surfaces and areas, including landscaping, walks, drives, all adjacent building
surfaces (including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc.) and equipment and any labels and signage
from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other
suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such
protection.
B. Protect all interior surfaces and areas, including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc. and equipment
and any labels and signage from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields,
masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by
failure to provide such protection.
C. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traffic away or around work
area as required.
3.08 CLEAN UP
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-13 PAINTING
A. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means
and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
B. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials
and debris.
C. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of
same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water I solvents as well as all other cleaning and
protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
removers / strippers in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.09 TOUCH UP PAINTING OF EXISTING FINISHES
A. Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual for repainting of existing finishes.
B. Use finish coat of respective new surface paint system for minor repair of existing finishes. Use
system primer where existing finishes are damaged down to bare surface.
END OF SECTION 09 90 OO
ARCON 15095 09 90 00-14 PAINTING
SECTION 260010
BASIC ELECTRJCAL REQUIREMENTS
PARTI GENERAL
1.01 GENERALCONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for the Construction of Buildings, Standard Form of the
American Institute of Architects current edition, The Supplementary General Conditions and the
Mechanical and Electrical Special Conditions are apart of these specifications.
I.O2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Basic Electrical Requirements are specifically applicable to Divisions 26,27 & 28.
B. This specification and accompanying plans cover and shall govern the installation of a complete electrical
system, all as specifically set forth herein, and as indicated in the plans.
C. The drawings and these specifications are complementary each to the other, and what is called for by one
shall be as binding as ifcalled for by both. They are intended to include everything requisite and
necessary to the entire finishing ofthe work notwithstanding that every item necessarily required by such
work is not especially mentioned or shown.
D. This Contractor shall fumish all labor and material necessary for the complete system and items of work
including (but not limited to):
l. All work complaint with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and the National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code
2. All work complaint with Illinois Administrative Code (lAC) 180 and all building codes as listed in
IAC Section 180.60
3. All electrical service equipment forthe building as indicated on the plans and as herein specified
and/or as required by the Service Companies for general and emergency lighting, and power.
4. Equipment wiring
5. Wiring Devices
6. Structured Telecommunications Cabling and Enclosures
7. All branch circuit wiring
8. Fumish, install and connect all conduit, fittings, outlet boxes and junction boxes, complete with
wiring as required for complete systems.
9 . Fumish. install and connect all switches. receptacles and miscellaneous electrical equipment as
required and as shown on the plans and as hereinafter specified.
E. Contractor will distinctly understand that the work described herein is to be a finished job, and the whole
completed in a workmanlike manner. The omission from either the drawings or specifications of minor
details which ordinarily form a part of first class work of this character and are necessary to the
completion ofthis project as contemplated and described, shall not be a cause for any extra cost, but shall
be included by this Contractor as if specifically mentioned or shown.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Materials, equipment and installation thereof shall conform to the latest editions of the following:
1. ANSI - American National Standards lnstitute
2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
3. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufactueres
4. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
5. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
6. NBS - National Bureau of Standards
7. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
8. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
9. OSftA - Occupation Safety and Health Act.
10. IIL - Underwriters Laboratores
1 1. BOCA - Building Officials & Code Administrators International, lnc.
12. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society ofNorlh America
ARCON 15095 26001O - 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
13. tAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
14. All materials, equipment, and installation thereof shall conform to the standards of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and of the Underwriters'Laboratories (UL)
B. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in
violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. In every installation where regulations of electric utility and telephone companies apply, conformance
with their regulations is mandatory and any costs involved shall be included in the Contract, with the
exception of extra facility and other charges which are directly paid by the Owner. or as otherwise
instructed herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in each Division 26,27 &.28 Section:
C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,
products and accessories in a single submittal.
D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
E. Contractor shall review all shop drawings prior to submitting them for Architect/Engineer's review.
Contractor shall stamp each shop drawing to certifu that he has reviewed it. Engineer will not check any
drawings that Contractor has not stamped with his review certification.
F. Owner's representative shall review all materials, equipment, fixtures, motor control centers, panelboards,
control panels, etc., and other appurtenances provided for this work before proceeding with the purchase
and installation.
G. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data
necessary for the Owner's Representative to ascertain that the proposed equipment/fixtures and materials
comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly
identify equipmenVfixtures being submitted.
H. Submittals for individual system and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or
component shall be made for the system as a whole. Where necessary, submit plans of the system
drawing on sheet sizes same as the contract drawings. Partial submittals will not be considered for
approval.
I. Owner's Representative review of shop drawings will be rendered as a service only and shall not be
considered as a guarantee ofmeasurements or ofbuilding conditions, nor shall it be construed as relieving
the Contractor ofbasic responsibilities under his contract.
J. Ifthe shop drawings show variations from contract requirements because ofshop practice or other
reasons, Contractor shall make specific reference to such variation in his letter oftransmittal in order that,
of acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment; otherwise Contractor will not be
relieved ofthe responsibility for executing the work in accordance with contract documents even though
such shop drawings have been reviewed.
K. All shop drawings shall be submitted to permit Owner's Representative ample time to review before
material is released for delivery to job.
L. Contractor shall maintain a permanent file of shop drawings to turn over to Owner's Representative at
completion of project.
M. Submitals shall include 114" = 1'-0" dimensioned drawings of all electrical equipment rooms for review
before installation continues.
N. Coordination and Record Drawings:
l. In addition tothe preparation and submittal of shop drawings and product data formanufactured
electrical equipment and materials, prepare and maintain in current stafus, a complete set of
detailed, completely circuited, and dimensioned electrical record drawings for electrical work
included under the Contract.
ARCON 1509s 260010 - 2 BASIC ELECTR]CAL REQUIREMENTS
P.
2. In addition to the floor and ceiling plans, layouts of all functionally critical areas and congested
areas, such as mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. shall be drawn at a minimum scale of
l/4" equals l'-0" with all details of construction shown.
3. Record drawings shall be made under the direction and supervision of the Contractor and shall
show all electrical work inclusive of conduit, wiring, electrical equipment and devices, lighting
fixture locations and elevations, points where conduit enters or leaves structural slabs and walls,
junction boxes, conduit supports and inserts. The complete electrical distribution system from
source or sources up to and including each branch circuit panelboard shall be shown and
dimensioned exactly as installed, with all feeders located on plan. Major equipment and apparatus
shall be shown to scale and properly located. Drawings shall also show locations and depths of
underground conduits and ducts and their terminations, as installed.
4. Coordination drawings shall be made on 3 mil mylar sheets or CAD drawing compatible with
AutoCAD Version 14.0 of the same size and with the same border lines and title blocks as the
Architect{Engineer's Drawings, with the Contractor's name added.
5. Coordinate electrical work with the work of other trades and in preparing the record drawings,
check the work of other trades in order to avoid possible installation conflicts arising therefrom. In
the event of conflicts of interferences that cannot be resolved in the field, request a written
clarification from the Architect/Engineer.
6. Record drawings shall indicate the electrical installation exactly as constructed and shall be
periodically revised to reflect all changes, including those required by the Architect/Engineer, those
which are or have been found necessary in the field and those which may be suggested by the
Contractor and accepted by the ArchitectlEngineer. Drawings shall be revised when considered
necessary the the Architect{Engineer or the Contractor in order to facilitate proper coordination.
7. If, in the opinion of the Architect{Engineer, the drawings are in acceptable condition after each has
been finally revised, they may be submitted as the field record drawings.
Equipment Drawings:
l. Provide complete set of shop drawings bound in permanent binder.
2. Provide typewritten list of each type, quantity and manufacturer of lamp installed.
3. Provide typelwiffen list of each rype, quantity, size and manufacturer of fuse, motor overload
heater, etc., installed.
4. Provide a complete list of all replaceable components for maintenance purposes.
Maintenance and Operating Manuals
1. Maintenance and Operation Manual, submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the
technical sections. Fumish five (5) copies, bound in hardback binders, manufacturer's standard
binders or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical
section, but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the
remaining manuals prior to contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the works 'MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL", the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of
Contractor and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses and telephone
numbers ofeach subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for
the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab
sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily
read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manual shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control ofthe equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installation and maintenance instructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
ARCON 1509s 260010 - 3 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
o.
C. Testing methods.
h. Performance data.
i. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range and frequency.
j. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare
parts and name ofservicing organization.
k. Appendix; list qualified perrnanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment,
including addresses and certified qualifications.
A. POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
l. Fumish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical
sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams,
control diagrams and controls sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave
operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions
were directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and
equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and procedure in the event of
equipment failure. Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating
instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight
and shall be secured to prevent easy removal.
1.05 REGULATORY R-EQUTR_EMENTS
A. The work shall be performed in accordance with codes, laws, and ordinances of Federal, State and local
governing bodies having jurisdiction.
B. In case of differences between building codes, Federal and State laws, local ordinaces and utility
company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.
C. Fire Alarm: Conform to the latest edition of NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code)
D. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
E. Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
F. Obtain approvals, where required, fiom inspection authorities for exit, emergency lighting, fire alarm
device locations, and other electrical installations requiring specific approval. Prints ofthe Electrical
Drawings, for this purpose, will be furnished by the Architect on request. Required wiring diagrams shall
be provided and submitted for approval by the Contractor. Copies of the final approved drawings shall
be delivered to the Architect. Approvals shall be obtained before commencement of related work.
G. Pay all fees, and other charges incident to electrical work and obtain and pay for required insurance,
permits, licenses, and inspections. Arrange for all required inspections and deliver certificates and
approval for same to the Architect, as a requirement for final payment.
1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. The drawings fumished in the bid set are to give the general intent of the mechanical and electrical
requirements. All information for installation is not shown and is not fully coordinated with Architectural
and Mechanical drawing and specifications. They are not intended as final installation drawings,
although they may be used as a guide if the Contractor feels that sufficient information for installation is
shown. Installation must be fully coordinated with all trades. If it is necessary to clari! or provide more
detail than is shown, this Contractor shall prepare drawings and submit the same for review and comment.
B. Carefully examine the contract documents, visit the site, and thoroughly become familiar with the local
conditions relating to the work. Failure to do so will not relieve the contractor of the Contract.
C. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
D. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project Conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
I.O7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS
A. Before ordering any materials or proceeding with the work, this Contractor shall verif, all measurements
at the site and be responsible for correctness of same. No extra compensation will be allowed because of
ARCON 15095 260010 - 4 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
difference between the actual measurements and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference
which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect's Superintendent on the job for rectification
before proceeding with the work.
Contractor and/or manufacturer shall verifu that the capacity and duty specified meets the characteristics
of the equipment he submits for review.
If equipment is submitted for review and does not meet the physical size or arrangement of what was
scheduled and specified, Contractor shall pay for all alternations required to accommodate such
equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall also pay all costs for additional work
required by other Contractors, Owner, Architect or Engineer to make changes which would allow the
equipment to fit the space.
1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND OPENINGS
Contractor shall field verifo the size of existing openings, windows, doors, corridors, rooms, etc. for
access of the new equipment into the existing building. If openings are too small for access, then
Contractor shall provide new or enlarged openings, at his own expense, to facilitate entrance into existing
space or building. Contractor may elect to order the equipment disassembled and/or with split housing
for entrance into the existing space or building. Contractor shall reassemble equipment after it is in the
space at his own expense.
1.09 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS
A. Provide on-site assistance in testing and verification of systems for this project to meet occupancy
conditions.
B. Provide up to three on-site assistance visits within one year of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2,OI MATERJALS AND EQUIPMENT
E.
Proposal shall be based upon the furnishing of all materials and equipment as specified, which in every
case shall be new and, where not specifically referred to by manufacturer's name, ofthe best grade and
quality available.
Materials used through this installation shall be new (without blemish or defect) and the best of their
respective kind and the same shall be installed in a neat, accurate, and workmanlike manner, and in a
manner to permit the work of other trades to also be installed wherever the work covered by this
specification meets with, or must be considered, in connection with the work of other trades working on
this installation. Equipment shall not be used for temporary light and power purposes, including lamps.
This workmanship and these materials must be executed and furnished in a manner entirely satisfactory to
the Owner's Representative.
Items of equipment of within a specificy category type (such as fuses, conduit, electrical distribution
equipment Idistribution switchboards, panelboards, motor starters, enclosed switches] wiring systems),
shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout, unless otherwise indicated or accepted by the
Architect/Engineer.
Where two types of similar equipment are specified or shown on the drawings, the Base Bid will be based
on the higher quality or greater number. All work shown on the drawings & specifications will be
adjusted to comply with all sections of the Local Codes.
Wherever in the specifications, a particular article or material is definitely mentioned, it shall be provided
and no substitutions shall be allowed, especially insofar as the submittal of the base bid is concerned.
Should this Contractor desire to substitute other materials for those specified, he may submit these
substitutions in the form ofvoluntary alternates to the base bid, designating appropriate additions or
deductions for each alternate. Should no alternates be submitted, the contract shall be entered into on the
basis of the specified base bid equipment. Final review of equipment shall be by the Owner's
Representative. Voluntary alternates will only be recognized at the time of bid.
A specification item followed by one (1) or more manufacturers; names of other manufacturers may be
submitted for review to the Owner's Representative a minimum of seven (7) days prior to receiving bids.
Acceptance will be granted only ifissued by addendum (no exceptions).
B.
C.
A.
B.
C.
D.
ARCON 15095 26001 0 - 5 BASIC ELECTRICAL REOUIREMENTS
G. A specification item followed by one (1) or more manufacturers and "or equal" is open to all equal
products or materials. However, Contractor shall supply one (l) of the listed manufacturers at no
additional cost if Owner's Representative determines substituted product unsatisfactory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Receive, handle, and store electrical items and materials at the project site. Materials and electrical items
shall be so placed that they are protected from damage and deterioration. Damaged or othjerwise
unsuitable materials and electrical items shall be immediately removed from the site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The Drawings for work under Divisions 26,27 & 28 are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the
scope ofwork and indicate the general arrangement ofconduit, boxes, equipment, devices, fixtures and
other work included in the Contract.
B. Location of items required by the Drawings or specifications not fixed by dimensions are approximate
only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be determined at the site
and shall be subject to the approval ofthe Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
exact/final location and coordination ofall devices and in case any devices are not installed in correct
location, Contractor shall move same including all necessary cutting and patching at Contractor's
expense.
C. Owner reserves right to change position of anylall devices or fixtures within l0'-0" radius before work is
installed without extra charge.
D. Check with Heating Contractor as to location of radiation, Ventilation Contractor as to location of ducts
and grilles, and Plumbing Contractor as to location of piping before installing the work.
E. Contractor shall consult with the Architect and review the plans to verifu the exact locations of all outlets
and mounting heights to insure that all outlets are above counters where cabinet work and/or furniture
occurs and switches are at the correct side of door swings.
F. This Contractor shall consult with the Equipment Suppliers for the correct sizes of all outlets in sufficient
time before wall construction.
G. Follow drawings in layout out work, check drawings of other trades to verifu spaces in which work will
be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points.
H. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Architect{Engineer shall be notified before
proceeding with installation.
I. Minor conduit rerouting and changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
J. Whenever it becomes necessary for the complete fulfillment of this specification to furnish labor or
materials, other than that which is generally accepted by trade agreement or general practice to belong to
his particular trade or branch of work, he shall sublet such work or shall employ workmen regularly
employed, to the end that there will be no delay or stoppage of work due to infringement or alleged
infringement of trade agreements as to jurisdiction.
K. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
L. Furnish other trades advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings
needed for the work, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected
to install their work properly and without delay.
M. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall
assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit
and revise coordinate shop drawings.
N. With the approval of the Architect{Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor
modifications in the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other
trades or for proper execution of the work.
ARCON 15095 260010 - 6 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
O. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such
other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as
directed by the Architect/Engineer.
P. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving
other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Electrical Contractor shall verifu
measurements. Discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's attention for interpretation.
a. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus
furnished under this Division, and notifu the Architect/Engineer accordingly. In the event of failure to
give sufiicient notice in time to arrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of
providing such openings thereafter.
R. Location of electrical outlets, lighting panels, cabinets, equipment, etc. is approximate and exact locations
shall be determined at the project.
S. Electrical Contractor shall refer to contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale
drawings.
T. Equipment shall be installed with ample space allowed for its removal for repairs or changes. Ready
accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided so that other equipment, in
place or to be installed, need not be moved at any time.
U. Sufficient access for the installation of electrical equipment shall be determined prior to delivery.
V. Compare all contract drawings and specifications to determine the intent of the two together. In case of
any discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the matter shall be referred to the Owner's
Representative before any work is installed. The interpretation of the intent shall rest solely with the
Owner's Representative, and his decision shall be considered final.
W. Any changes of the electrical layout necessary to make the work conform to the entire facility as
construction, fit the work of other trades or conform to the rules of the city and state and/or other
regulating bodies (Public Health, NFPA, etc.), shall be made without additional cost.
X. Omission in the contract drawings and/or specifications of any items necessary for the proper completion
or operation of the work outlined in this specification shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing
same without additional cost.
Y. WORK BY OTMRS
l. Except as otherwise noted or specified, this Contractor shall not include the following apparatus
which shall be provided under other contracts: Electric motors will be set on foundation by others,
but shall be wired by this Contractor.
2. All apparatus furnished by others to this Contractor shall be carefully protected, neatly connected,
and shall be put in first class condition at time it is submitted for acceptance. The Contractor shall
receive all equipment, sign for same and be responsible for its safety.
3. This Contractor shall coordinate with controls Contractor to ensure that all starters and equipment
are the proper type, have proper interlocks, holding coils, voltage, etc.. This Contractor will check
starter overloads with actual motor full load current nameplate rating.
a. Motors with a marked service factor not less than l. I 5 or marked with a temperature rise not
over 40degrees C. shall be set at l25o/o.
b. All other motors shall be set at I l5%.
4. Temperature controls wiring and conduit will be furnished and installed under Heating Contract.5. Control wiring for all plumbing motors, hot water circulating pumps, domestic hot water
recirculating pumps, sump pumps, sewage ejector, etc., will be installed and wired by the Electrical
Contractor.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect conduit and wireway openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps.
Cover fixtures, materials, equipment and devices or otherwise protect against damage from any cause,
ARCON 1s095 260010 -7 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
both before and after installation. Fixtures, materials, equipment, or condition or replaced, all at no
additional cost to Owner.
B. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards.
3.04 COOPERATION
A. Where jurisdictional rules require the assistance of electrical mechanics in the moving and setting of
electrically powered equipment. provide such assistance.
B. Where work covered by this section connects to equipment fumished under other sections, verifu
electrical work involved in the field and make proper connection to such equipment.
3.05 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Work shall be cleaned prior to the date of "substantial completion" as determined by the Owner's
Representative.
B. Clean equipment, restore all damaged materials, remove grease. oil, chemicals, paint spots and./or stains,
etc., and generally leave the work in A-l condition.
C. Retouch and,/or repaint all factory painted prime and/or finish coats where scratched or damaged.
Wherever retouching will not be satisfactory, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the Owner's
Representative had the option to require complete repainting until the desired appearance is obtained.
D. Lamps, fixtures, lenses, reflectors, etc., shall be cleaned and not sooner than ten (10) days prior to date of
substantial completion.
E. Remove from site all tools, equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish pertaining to contract work and
include all costs for such removal and disposition. All rubbish left will be removed by Owner and
services for same shall be back-charged to Contractor against final payout on contract.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETED SYSTEMS
A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, provide owner
with a demonstraton of all complete systems as follows:
I . Demonstrate to the Onwer's Representative, the essential features of all electrical systems specified.2. Show by start/stop operation, etc., the manner of control, resetting of protective devices and the
replacement of fuses, etc.
3. Demonstrate area lighting and show the location of panelboards, dimmers, time switches and
setting, etc.
4. Demonstrate all required maintenance functions.
5. In addition to training specified in othe sections herein, Include a total of 8 hours for demonskation
of basic electrical systems. Hours and arrangement to be scheduled by Owner's Representative.
3.07 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. Veri! motors for proper rotation prior to operation.
B. Test all motor controls for proper operations.
C. Test all duplex receptacles for proper polarity and grounding.
D. Measure, load, and record readings on all feeders, motors, transformers and panelboards, etc. Reconnect
panelboard loads as may be necessary to obtain a reasonable balance ofloads on all phases. Variation
shall not exceed 10% phase to phase.
E. Provide three (3) typewritten copies ofthe recordings in bound booklets prior to request for final
payment.
F. Demonstrate by tests, at the request of the Owner's Representative, the compliance of the installation with
these specifications, the drawings, the National Electric Code, and the accepted standards ofgood
workmanship. These tests shall include operation of lights and equipment, continuity of the conduit
system. grounding resistances, and insulation resistances on not more than ten (10) representative circuits
and any other circuits for which a justifiable reason exists for such tests. All labor and testing equipment
for the performance of these tests shall be furnished by the Contractor.
ARCON 15095 260010 - 8 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUlREMENTS
3.08 GUARANTEE
A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, the complete
electrical system as indicated on the drawings and in these specifications shall be guaranteed by this
Contractor for one (l) year from date offinal acceptance by the Architect against defective material and
workmanship. Defective workmanship and material developing during the guarantee period shall be
repaired or replaced by this Contractor without cost to the Owner.
B. Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner or Architect of failure of any part of the guaranteed
materials or equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be repaired or replaced
with new, by and at the expense of the Electrical Contractor.
C. Make all service calls, replacements, repairs and adjustments during the guarantee period without cost to
Owner.
END OF SECTION 260010
ARCON 15095 26001O - 9 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 260519
BUILDTNG WIRE AND CABLE
PARTI GENERAL
1.OT SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single conductor building wire.
B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
C. Wiring connectors.
D. Electrical tape.
E. Heat shrink tubing.
F. Wire pulling lubricant.
I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.
B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft; 201 l.
C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical
Purposes; 20 1 0 (Reapproved 20 l4).
D. ASTM 878718787ilil - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper
Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).
E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic
Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 201 0.
F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating
Rubber Tapes; 2013.
G. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
H. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC)l National
Electrical Contractors Association; 20 I 2 (NECAA{ACMA I 02).
I. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy;
National ElectricalManufacturers Association;2009 (ANSINEMA WC 7OIICEA 3-95-658).
J. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
International Electrical Testing Association; 20 I 3 (ANSIAIETA ATS).
K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
M. LrL 4 - Armored Cable; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N. W 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. LrL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 4864,-4868 - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
a LIL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. t[ 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride. Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
ARCON 15095 260519 - 1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
I.O4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with
the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for
voltage drop.
2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable
for use with the conductors to be installed.
3. Noti! Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
I.O7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than l4
degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this
temperature is unavoidable, noti! Engineer and obtain direction before proceeding with work.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
Iisting.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,
permitted, or required.
C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.
E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.
F. Armored cable is permitted only as follows:
l. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to
luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to damage.
c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.
G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Southwire Co.
B. Triangle Wire and Cable.
ARCON 15095 260519 - 2 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
2.03 CONDUCTORAND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc.
as required for a complete operating system.
D. Comply withNEMA WC 70.
E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with LrL 83.
F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
G. Conductor Material:
l. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.
Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivify, uncoated copper conductors
complying with ASTM 83, ASTM 88, or ASTM B787lB 787M unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
H. Minimum Conductor Size:
l. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
I ) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
3) 20 A,277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: l0 AWG, for voltage drop.
I. Conductor Color Coding:
l. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority havingjurisdiction.
Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: lntegrally colored insulation.
3. Color Code:
a. 480Y1277 V,3 Phase,4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b. 208Y1120 V,3 Phase,4 Wire System:
l) Phase A: Black.
2\ Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.
e. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.
f. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with efsting color code
when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having
jurisdiction.
2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:
l. Copper Building Wire:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
b. EncoreWireCorporation: www.encorewire.com.
c. SouthwireCompany: www.southwire.com.
B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. ConductorStranding:
ARCON 15095 260519 - 3 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
2.05
l. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D. lnsulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E. Insulation:
1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or TFIHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.
a. Installed Exterior or Underground: Type XHHW-2.
F. Conductor: Copper.
G. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
ARMORED CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for use in
classified firestop systems to be used.
B. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
C. Insulation: Type THHN.
D. Grounding: Combination of interlocking armor and integral bonding wire.
E. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be
connected, and listed as complying with LIL 486A4868 or UL 486C as applicable.
B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
L Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use fwist-on insulated spring connectors.2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
connectors.
C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
l. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
connectors where connectors are required.
D. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V,221 degrees F for standard applications and302
degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with tIL 486D
for damp and wet locations.
E. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
F. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
WIRTNG ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:
l. Manufacturers:
a- 3M: www.3m.com.
b. PlymouthRubberEuropa: www.plymouthrubber.com.
2. Vinyl lnsulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL
510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for
application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to Z2l
degrees F.
3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM
D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194
degrees F and short-term266 degrees F overload service.4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil;
suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather
vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.
2.06
2.07
ARCON 1s095 260519 - 4 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heary-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for
direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable
for use at the installation temperature.
D. Use mechanical compression for 6 AWG or larger or any connection made within any type of exlerior
junction box or device to include. Cover connector with insulating tape or heat shrinkable insulation
equivalent to 150% conductor insulation.
E. Outdoor boxes (Including building mounted boxes used for outdoor devices) and undergroud connections
of anytype #l2to#6 AWG.
L Ideal Weatherproof wire connectors or equal.
a. Silicon filled wire connectors designed to meet LIL 486D standards
b. Size per manufacturer for number and wire sizes
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verifi, that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verifu that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verif, that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D. Veri! that raceway installation is complete and supported.
E. Verifu that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
F. Verifu that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. CircuitingRequirements:
l. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shou.n. determine exact routing required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and powerJimited
circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate,
combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.
7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up
to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not
permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.
8. Provide oversized neutral/grounded conductors where indicated and as specified below.
a. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders fed from K-rated transformers.
b. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders serving panelboards with 200 percent rated
neutral bus.
B. lnstall products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
D. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120.
E. Installation in Raceway:
1. Tape ends ofconductors and cables to prevent infiltration ofmoisture and other contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
ARCON 15095 260519 - 5 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by
the manufacturer.
F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.
G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and
methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction. Provide independent support fiom building
structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.
1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do
not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.
2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits.
H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
L Armored Cable (Type AC):
a. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings.
b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do
not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
I. Install conductors with a minimum of l2 inches of slack at each outlet.
J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.
K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside
enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
l. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in
conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting,
nicking or damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and
other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque
settings.
6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.
M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the
application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.
1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or
heat shrink tubing.
a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount ofrubber splicing electrical tape or
electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering ofvinyl insulating electrical tape.
2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or
heat shrink tubing.
a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical
tape.
b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of
moisture sealing electrical tape.
3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.
N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
O. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at
each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch
circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.
P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods as required.
ARCON 15095 260519 - 6 BUILD]NG WIRE AND CABLE
a. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices,
including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
R. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA l.
S. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within l0 ft of location
shown.
T. Use wiring methods indicated.
U. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
V. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
W. Protect exposed cable from damage.
X. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Y. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Z. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
AA. Identi& and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 260553. Identifu each conductor with
its circuit number or other designation indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALTTY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is
required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.
END OF SECTION 260519
ARCON 15095 260s19 - 7 BU]LDING WIRE AND CABLE
SECTION 260529
CUf-IING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PARTT GENERAL
1.01 GENERALCONDITIONS
A. Equipment shall not be held in place by its own dead weight. Base anchor fasteners shall be provided in
each case.
B. All cutting and patching of new and,/or existing surfaces will be the responsibility of the Electrical
Contractor. Surfaces will be restored to its original condition and will be to the satisfaction of the Ovrner
and the Architect. All patching will be by tradesmen normally employed by each specialty and will be
paid by the Electrical Contractor.
C. Contractor shall give the Architect complete information as to size of openings in floors, walls, etc., so
that such openings may be provided as the building progresses.
D. If openings are omitted or incorrect through failure to follow above instructions, the Contractor shall
engage the Contractor for general finishes construction to cut and patch at his own expense to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
I.O2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suppon and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM Al23lAlz3trl - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products;2013.
B. ASTM Al53iA153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
2009.
C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on lron and Steel; 2013.
D. MFI{A-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association;2004.
E. ICC-ES ACO1 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009.
F. ICC-ES AC I 06 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements;
2006
G. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010
H. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2009.
I. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:
l. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as
necessary for the complete installation of eleckical work.
2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where
applicable.
3. Where suppoft and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance
with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum
safety factor of
-.
lnclude consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads
where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
ARCON 15095 260529 - 1 CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS
AND SUPPORTS
5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.
a. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
b. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
Al23lA123M or ASTM A153/Al53M.
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.
l. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and
associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.
1. Comply withMFMA-4.
E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:
l. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types
indicated for the specified applications.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Expansive screw anchors, shields, or other fastening items containing lead or other material that might
loosen or melt under fire conditions shall not be used. No items shall rest on or depend for support on
suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, splines, etc.).
B. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type
adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
C. Sleeves for conduits shall be mild steel tube, galvanized inside and outside, equal to rigid conduit.
D. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized angles or channels
supported with 3/8" threaded rods anchored to the building construction. Any necessary Unistrut and/or
steel to span construction members will be furnished and installed.
E. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps.
2. Concrete Stnrctural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts.
3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded
fasteners.
4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.
5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.
6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
F. Formed Steel Channel:
1. Product: Unistrut
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA
1.
C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or
other systems.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support from suspended ceiling
support system or ceiling grid.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support from roofdeck.
ARCON 15095 260529 - 2 CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS
AND SUPPORTS
F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support
equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud
walls when wall strength is not suflicient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to
provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own
weight for support.
H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
I. Remove temporary supports.
END OF SECTION 260529
ARCON 15095 260529 - 3 CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS
AND SUPPORTS
SECTION 260534
CONDUIT
PART1 GENERAL
1.OI SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC).
C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
D. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
E. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).
F. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).
G. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
H. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.
I. Conduit fittings.
J. Accessories.
K. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete encasement of conduits.
B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 260529 - CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SIIPORTS.
D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 260537 - Boxes.
F. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.
B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.
C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005.
D. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EMC); 2005.
E. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
F. NECA l0 I - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2013.
G. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2004.
H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC)I National Electrical
Contractors Association; 200 3.
L NEMA FB 1 - Fittings. Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,
and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSINEMA FB 1).
J. NEN4{ RN 1 - Pollvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Extemally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
K. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2013.
L. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association : 20 1 5 .
ARCON 15095 260534 - 1 CONDUIT
M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, lncluding All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
N. fIL I - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 6.4 - Electrical fugid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
a UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. LL 5148 - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A fugid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
T. W 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
U. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.O4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All building wiring shall be routed in approved metallic raceway (conduit) unless otherwise specifically
noted.
B. All conduit shall be routed concealed (above lay-in ceiling, within walls, below grade or slab, etc.) within
all finished spaces unless otherwise noted.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit,
metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and
conduit bodies.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
sholryr.
I.O7 DELryERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance ofdebris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI CONDUITAPPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the
specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive
requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit.
C. Underground:
l. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
ARCON 15095 260534 - 2 CONDUIT
4. Where rigid pollvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit
where emerging from underground.
5. Where rigid polryinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.
6. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide
supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit
emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
D. Embedded Within Concrete:
l. Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2. Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer):
Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
L. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or aluminum
rigid metal conduit.
l. Corrosive locations include, but are not limited to:
a. Cooling towers.
b. Pools and pool equipment rooms
M. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.
N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
l. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.
c. Generators
o. Fished in Existing walls, where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.
2.02 CONDUITREQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they
comply with specified requirements. are free from corrosion. and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel
through them.
B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise lndicated:
l. Branch Circuits: 112 inch (16 mm) trade size.2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.3. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.
E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
size requirements specifi ed.
ARCON 15095 260534 - 3 CONDUIT
2.03 ALUMINUM RJGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed
and labeled as complying with UL 6A.
B. Fittings:
l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 5148.
2. Material: Use aluminum.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression
(gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.04 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (rMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 1242.
B. Fittings:
l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression
(gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.0s Pvc-coATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Manufacturers:
l. Robroy Industries; _: www.robroy.com.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN I and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.
D. PVC-CoatedFittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.
2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with lll- 5148.
3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.
E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of
15 mil.
2.06 FLEXTBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as
complying with UL l, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
C. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with LIL
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
D. Description: Interlockedsteelconstruction.
E. Fittings: NEMAFB 1.
2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed
and labeled as complying with UL 360.
C. Fittings:
ARCON 1s095 26A534 - 4 CONDUIT
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
D. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
E. Fittings: NEMA FB l.
2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed
and labeled as complying withUL 797.
C. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with tIL
s 148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
D. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB l; steel compression fype. Steel set screw type shall be used
for conduit runs withing block walls.
2.09 RIGID POLYVII\TYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid pollvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and
listed and labeled as complying with LrL 65 1; Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated; rated for use with
conductors rated 90 degrees C.
B. Fittings:
l. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL
65 l; material to match conduit.
2.IO ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.
B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit
to be installed.
C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings
to be installed.
D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.
E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the pafticular fittings to be installed.
F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be
installed.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verifo that field measurements are as shovin on drawings.
B. Verif, that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C. Verifu that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
D. Verifu routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
E. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to
complete wiring system.
ARCON 15095 260534 - 5 CONDUIT
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
C. lnstall aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.
D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
E. lnstall PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the
manufacturer.
F. lnstall rigid pollvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 11 l.
G. Conduit Routing:
l. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
2. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
3. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
4. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
a. Across roofs.
b. Across top of parapet walls.
c. Across building exterior surfaces.
5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible
manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building
structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.
6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.
7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent ofthree 90 degree bends between pull
points.
8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings
where moisture may collect.
10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.
I 1. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is
not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.
12. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
H. Conduit Support:
1 . Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support fiom piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support fiom ceiling support system. Do
not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.
l. Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduitjoint compound on field-cut threads ofgalvanized steel
conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings
or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into
connectors.
ARCON 15095 260534 - 6 CONDUIT
5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for
dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure,
provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.
7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.
8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.
J. Penerrations:
l. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams,
without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves
flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior ofconduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent
entry of moisture and gases.
6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade.
7 . Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of
membrane.
8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs
where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as
indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include
proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.
9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.
10. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating ofpartitions and other elements, using materials
and methods specified in Section 078400.
K. Underground Installation:
l. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 260553 along entire conduit length
for service entrance where not concrete-encased.
L. Embedment Within Stmctural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Structural Engineer):
L lnstall conduits within middle one third of slab thickness.
2. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring ofconcrete.
M. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be
concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 033000 with minimum concrete cover of
3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.
N. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous (classified) locations,
provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70.
O. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and
expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This
includes, but is not limited to:
l. Where conduits cross structuraljoints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by sefflement or frost.
P. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial
temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near
the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.
a Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed
by others. Leave minimum slack of l2 inches at each end.
R. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
S. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260553.
ARCON 15095 260534 - 7 CONDUIT
3.03 FIELD QUALTTY CONTROL
A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
B. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions,
repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Conect deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preseerve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified within applicable sections of building specification.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing
penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation..
END OF SECTION 260534
ARCON 15095 260534 - 8 CONDUIT
SECTION 260537
BOXES
PART1 GENERAL
1.OT SECTION INCLUDES
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used asjunction and pull boxes.
B. Cabinets and enclosures, includingjunction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.
I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260529 - CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SIiPPORTS.
B. Section 260534 - Conduit:
l. Conduit bodies and other fittings.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length andior number of bends between
pulling points.
C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices:
l. Wall plates.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.
I.O3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
C. NEMA FB I - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,
and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSLNEI\,IA FB 1).
D. NEMA OS I - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Suppofts; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSIAfEMA OS 1).
E. NEI\4A OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSIA,IEMA OS 2).
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association : 20 | 4.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 5l4,A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATTVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1 . Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other
potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical
equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of
the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps,
support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected
conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.
ARCON,15095 260537 - I BOXES
5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under
other sections or by others.
6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted
boxes where indicated.
8. Notifu Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
B. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
I.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacfurer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for outlet and device boxes,
cabinets and enclosures, and floor boxes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes. cabinets and
enclosures, floor boxes, and underground handhole enclosures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BoxES
A. GeneralRequirements:
l. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70
and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to
accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specifi ed.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, tncluding Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:
l. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or
required; fumish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.
3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.
4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.
5. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masorxl, vv6lls.
7. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where
required.
8. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
9. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
10. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS l, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.
I 1. CastMetal Boxes: ComplywithNEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with LrL 514A;
furnish with threaded hubs.
ARCON 15095 260537 -2 BOXES
12. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of
load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where
required.
13. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use
fi eld-connected gangable boxes.
14. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726.
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
l. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with LL 50 and L,rL 50E, or UL 5084.
2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R" painted steel.
3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 GENERAL
A. In general, boxes shall be galvanized, pressed steel, have depth and shape best suited to the intended use,
and contain knockouts of quantity and size equal to the conduit runs to be connected thereto. All boxes
shall be securely fastened in place and shall provide sufficient support to the purpose intended.
B. Outlet boxes for mounting fixtures shall be equipped with slip-in or boltless fixture studs. Hickey studs
will NOT be acceptable. Installation of the larger fixtures shall be made with hangers to support fixtures
independently of outlet box.
C. Outlet boxes not mounting fixtures and at which no connections are made shall be equipped with steel
cover plates. Although no connections are made in such outlets, sufficient wire shall be provided in each
for making future connection.
D. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized, octagon, 4" x l-112" deep without fixture stud, 2-ll8" deep with
fixture stud.
E. Concrete boxes where used shall have a minimum of 1" concrete cover.
F. Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather-resistant (rain tight), having appropriate covers fitted with gaskets
and fastened with screws. Boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds series CPS or Series V., as applicable.
G. Switch outlet boxes for local light control switches, convenience outlets, telephone, etc., shall be
galvanized, square 4" x 7-712", with raised cover to fit flush with finish wall line. Multiple gang switch
outlets shall consist of the required gang with raised covers. Where outlet boxes occur in exposed
concrete block walls, boxes shall be installed in block cavity with a raised square edge tile cover of
sufficient depth to extend out to face of block. Outlet boxes for special purposes shall be suitable for the
purpose intended as herein specified and shown on the drawings.
H. See drawings for additional information. The above is the minimum specification unless otherwise noted
on the drawings.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verifu that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verifr that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C. Verifu that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not
indicated.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
NFPA 70.
ARCON 15095 260537 - 3 BOXES
D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.
F. Flush-mount boxes in hnished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or
permitted.
H. Box Locations:
1. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726.
2. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.
3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at
different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.
5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6
inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
6. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back;
provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.
7. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will
not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum
24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities
or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.
b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total
aggregate area ofopenings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet ofwall area.
8. Locatejunction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation ofconductors, and
to limit conduit length andior number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section
260534.
9. Locatejunction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the
Architect:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.
I. Box Supports:
1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section260529 using suitable supports
and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes
used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70.
Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support
system.
J. Install boxes plumb and level.
K. Flush-MountedBoxes:
1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, glpsum, plaster, etc. so that front
edge ofbox or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or
does not project beyond finished surface.
2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that fiont edge of box or associated raised
cover is flush with finished surface.
3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile. gypsum,
plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than l/8 inch at the edge ofthe box.
L. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
M. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.
ARCON 15095 260537 - 4 BOXES
N. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds
300 v.
O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. using materials and
methods specified in Section 078400.
P. Close unused box openings.
a. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or
designated for future use.
R Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
S. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations.
l. Adjust box locations up to l0 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for
installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION 260537
ARCON 15095 260537 - 5 BOXES
SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PARTI GENERAL
I.O1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification for Equipment
l. Panelboards
2. PanelboardSchedules
3. Existing Panelboard Schedules
4. Identificationlabels
I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
I.O3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
B. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Verifu frnal designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to
fabrication of identification products.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until
identification products have been installed.
2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and
installation of product.
I.06 QUALITY ASSURANCf,
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification for Equipment:
1 . Use identification nameplate or identification label to identifu each piece of electrical distribution
and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Panelboards:
1) Use identification nameplate to identifl, panelboard name.
2) Use Computer Generated Directory to identifu load(s) served for panelboards with a
door. Identifu spares and spaces.
3) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identifu load(s)
served for each branch device. ldentif! spares and spaces.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
ARCON 15095 260553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. lnstall products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. lnstall identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
l. Surface-MountedEquipment: Enclosurefront.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.
4. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
6. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point ofaccess.
C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion. with no bubbles or wrinkles and
edges properly sealed.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of
improper adhesion.
B. Panel identification
1 Provide identification for each lighting and appliance panelboard with a computer generated
directory accurately indicating rooms and/or equipment being serviced, sealed in plastic and
attached to door interior, etc. Note: Each index shall be sequenced in accord with actual panel
circuiting (i.e. left side - 1, 3, 5, 7 , etc., right side - 2, 4, 6, etc.).
2. Existing panelboards that require circuit modifications andior additions shall have their circuit
schedule completely replaced. All existing to remain circuits shall be traced to their load as
required and indicated on the circuit schedule.
END OF SECTION 260553
ARCON 15095 260553-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTTON 2627t7
EQUIPMENTWIRING
PARTl GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.
I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260519 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE.
B. Section 260534 - Conduit.
C. Section 260537 - Boxes.
D. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.
E. Section 262818 - Enclosed Switches.
1.03 Rf,FERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA WD I - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1999 (R 2010).
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2012.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180.
I.O4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's
instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
2. Determine connection locations and requirements.
B. Sequencing:
L lnstall rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.
2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,
confi gurations, and construction.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product
testing agency. lnclude instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation. and
installation of product.
I.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60.
C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
I.O7 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's
instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
B. Determine connection locations and requirements.
C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.
ARCON 15095 262717 - 1 EQUIPMENT WIRING
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 262818 and in individual equipment sections.
B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 262726.
C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 260534.
D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 260519.
E. Boxes: As specified in Section 260537.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verifi that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Final connections to all motors shall be made with flexible steel conduit. Final connections to roof
exhaust fans shall be made with "Sealtite" waterproof flexible conduit. Provide additional ground wire to
assure a perfect ground connection.
C. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with
watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
D. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
encountered.
E. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
F. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
G. lnstall suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment
connection boxes.
H. lnstall disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment
wiring requirements.
I. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
J. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring
requirements.
K. CoolersandFreezers: Cutandseal conduitopeningsinfreezerandcoolerwalls,floor,andceilings.
L. Seal roof penetrations as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262717
ARCON 15095 262717 -2 EQUIPMENT WIRING
SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PARTT GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Wall plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUTREMENTS
A. Section 260537 - Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision
G,2001.
B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal
Specification; Revision F, 1999.
C' NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 201 0.
D' NEN4A wD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; I999 (R 2010).
E' NEMA wD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2012.
F' NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adoptedby Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
G. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code l g0
H. W 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, lncluding All Revisions.
I' UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J' IrL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.K. W 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, lncluding All Revisions.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B' Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, andconfigurations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFpA 70.
B' Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 1g0.60C' Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell Incorporated; _: www.hubbell_wiring.com.
B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, lnc; _: www.leviton.com.
C. Pass & Seymour. a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; _: www.legrand.us
D' Source Limitations: For each type of wiring device furnish products produced by a single manufacturer
and obtained from a single supplier.
ARCON 15095 262726 - I WIRING DEVICES
2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed
outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
B. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
C. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.
D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
2.03 ALL WIRING DEI'ICES
A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specifi ed and indicated.
B. Finishes:
l. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with stainless steel wall plate unless otherwise
Unfinished Spaces: White with galvanized steel wall plate unless
3' Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover
unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A' Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silveralloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD I and NEMA WD O, ana listea u, .o*plying with UL 20 andwhere applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
l ' wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for backwiring with separate ground terminal screw.
B' Standard wall S.witches: Industrial specification grade,20 A, 1201277 V with standard toggle fype switchactuator and maintained contacts: single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or fourway as indicated on the drawings.
L Single pole
a. Hubbell IIBLl22t
b. Leviton 1221 - 2
c. Pass and Seymour PS20AC1I
Two pole
a. Hubbell L{BL 1222
b. Leviton 1222-2
c. Pass and SeymourPS20AC2I
Three way
a. Hubbell 1223
b. Levition 1223-2
c. Pass and SeymourPS20AC3I
C.
indicated.
2. Wiring Devices Installed in
otherwise indicated.
Pilot Light wall Switches: Industrial specification grade,20 A, l2o/277 v with red illuminated standardtoggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single pole single throw,double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
Locking wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, l2o/277 v with lever type keyed switchactuator and maintained contacts; switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, oouute pole singlethrow, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
2.45 INTERIOR RECEPTACLES
A' Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA wD I and NEMA WD 6,and listed as complying with uL 498, and where applicabte, Fs w-c-ss6; types as indicated on thedrawings.
1' Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for backwiring with separate ground terminal screw.
D.
ARCON 15095 262726 -2 WIRING DEVICES
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B. ConvenienceReceptacles:
l. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20&
single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
a. Hubbell HBL 5362
b. Leviton 5362
c. Pass and Seymour 5362A
C. GFCI Receptacles:
l. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed+hrough protection and light to
indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943,
class A.
2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade. duplex, 20A, 125Y, NEMA 5-20&
rectangular decorator style.
a. Hubbell GFR5352A
b. Levition 7899
c. Pass and Seymour 2094
3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 2OA, 125V. NEMA
5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL
498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types ofcorresponding wiring devices.2. Size: Standard; _.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
B. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 spec grade stainless steel.
C. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.
D. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and
corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed.
E. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and
corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs
connected and identified as extra-duty fype.
F. Plates shall be held in place with screws finished to match the plates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verif,, that field measurements are as shou,n on the drawings.
B. Verifu that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verifu that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verifu that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verifu that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
F. Verif,' that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring
devices.
G. Verif, that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
H. Verifu that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials fiom outlet boxes.
ARCON 15095 262726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES
3.03 TNSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.
B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike maruler in accordance with NECA l, including mounting
heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of wiring
devices provided under this section.
1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Receptacles: I 8 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.
2. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to
manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds
300 v.
F. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more
than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 314 tum around screw terminal and tightening
to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that
do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
I. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch
circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or
normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
J. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use
feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
K. Install in accordance with NTECA "Standard of lnstallation."
L. lnstall wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
M. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
O. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered
without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized
rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or
designated for future use.
a. Install receptacles horizontal with grounding pole on right hand side.
R. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
S. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
T. lnstall galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes andjunction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets in unfinished spaces.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 to obtain mounting heights
specified.
3.0s FrELD QUALTTY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
ARCON 1s095 262726 - 4 WIRING DEVICES
B. lnspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verifi proper
operation.
D. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verifu proper operation.
E. Verif, that each receptacle device is energized.
F. Test each receptacle to verifu operation and proper polarity.
G. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
H. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original
factory finish.
END OF SECTION 262726
ARCON 15095 262726 - 5 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 271005
STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA - INSIDE.PLANT
PARTl GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Communications system design requirements.
B. Communications pathways.
C. Copper cable and terminations.
D. Communications identification.
E. Data Cabling
I.O2 DEFTNITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service lnternational.
B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
Ladder Rack: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual
transverse members (rungs).
LAN: Local area network.
Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable
terminates.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H. RCDD: Registered CommunicationsDistributionDesigner.
l. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
I.O3 COODRINATION OF WORK
A' Contractor shall fumish and install all conduit/raceway as required for the structured cabling distributionsystem' This includes all raceway explicitly shown on plans or generically required for a complete,functional system.
B' Contractor shall fumish and install all specialty backboxes for devices as required for the structuredcabling distribution system. This includes all backboxes explicitly shown on plans-or g"r"ri.atty
required for a complete, functional system.
C' Contractor shall furnish and install all branch circuits required for the structured cabling distribution
system as specified. This includes all circuits explicitly shown on plans or generically iequired for acomplete, functional system.
r.O4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A' American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic IndustriesAlliance (ANSVTIA/EIA) ANSVTIA/EIA-568-8.l Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards Part 1: General Requirements, and all associated addenda.
B' ICEA 3-90-661 - Category 3,5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With orWithout An overall Shield) For Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications wiring SystemsTechnical Requirements; lnsulated Cable Engineers Association;2012. (ANSI/ICEA 5-90-661)
C' NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 1g0.
E' TIA-492LAAB-A - Detail Specification for 50-um Core Diameterll2i-umCladding Diameter Class laGraded-Index Multimode optical Fibers; Telecommunications Industry Association] Rev A. 2009.
ARCON 15095
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
271005 - 1 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
I.
J.
TIA492CLAA - Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers;
Telecommunications Industry Association; 1998 (R 2002).
TA-526-7 - OFSTP-7 - Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant;
Telecommunications Industry Association; 2002.
TIA-526-14 - OFSTP-14 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant;
Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B, 2010.
TIA-568-C.l - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; Telecommunications
lndustry Association; Rev C,2009 (with Addenda;2012).
TIA-568-C.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard -Part2: Balanced Twisted
Pair cabling components; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev c, 2009.
T[A/EIA-568-8.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber
Cabling Components Standard, and Addendum I - Additional Transmission Performance Splcifications
for 501125 um Optical Fiber Cables; Rev B, 2000; Addendum l.
TIA-569-C - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev
C,2012 (with Addenda; 2013).
T14-606-8 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Telecommunications
lndustry Association; Rev B, 2012.
T14-607-8 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer premises;
Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B, 2012 (withAddenda; 2013).
ANSVJ-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.
ANSVTIA/EIA-526 Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems, and all associated addenda.
ANSVTIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, and all
associated addenda.
International Standards Organization{nternational Electrotechnical Commission (ISO,{IEC) DIS I lg0l,
January 6,1994
American National Standards lnstitute (ANSI) x3T9.5 Requirements for UTp at 100 Mbps
w 444 - communications cables; current Edition, Including All Revisions.
UL 497 - Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
EIA-3 l0-D - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association;
1992
W. UL 50, Cabinets and Boxes
x. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords; Current Edition,lncluding All Revisions.
Y. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Z' Work performed should additionally comply with and follow guidelines established in the latest
edition/revision, as of the date of the Contract Documents, of ihe following publications:1. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMMI2. BICSI Customer-Owned Outside plant (CO_OSp)
3. American National Standards Institute,t,lational Electrical Contractors Associationtsuilding
lndustry Consulting Service lntemational (ANSIA,IECA/BICSI) 568-2001 Standard for Installing
Commercial Building Tel ecommunications Cabling
I.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
F.
G.
K.
L.
M.
N.
o.
P.
a
S.
T.
U.
R.
V.
ARCON 15095
DATA . INSIDE-PLANT
271005 -2 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
H.
l. Reviews of submittals are to establish general conformance to design intent and does not waive
contract requirements. Contractor is responsible for dimensions. quantities, mounting accessories,
methods of construction, and compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Provide separate submittal product data/shop drawings for each fixture, device, and equipment type
clearly indicating the type designation per the Contract Documents and all pertinent options and
accessories. Do not group similar fixture types together on a single cut sheet. Submittals which do
not indicate option data where multiple selections exist will be retumed without being reviewed.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.
l. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
2. Installationmethods.
Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of network layout,
showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations, service
entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD).
1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy ofproposed labeling schedules and identification
plates, in software and format selected by Owner.
2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
Evidence of qualifications for installer.
Test Plan: Complete and detailed plan, with list of test equipment, procedures for inspection and testing.
Submit along with product data. _
F. Field Test Reports.
G. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD).
1. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.3. Identifi distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and
operation and maintenance instructions; include copy ofproject record documents.
I.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 1g0.60.
C. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. Engage an
experienced contractor who:
l. Shall be fully capable and experienced in the installation of the communications systems specified,
and have a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar systems.2. Has BICSI-trained and -certified, or equally qualified and certified, installers and technicians on
staffand assign them to this project. If personnel of Contractor are not BICSI-trained and
-certified, Contractor to submit with bid all necessary credentials and certificates of training for
personnel staff for evaluation and determination by CPS OTS Sr. Infrastructure Manager that said
credentials and certificates are equal to BICSI standards. The project shall be staffed at all times by
lnstallers and Technicians who, in the role of lead crafts persons. will be able to provide leadership
and technical resources for the remaining crafts persons on the project.
3. Shall be certified by the manufacturing company(-ies) in all aspects of installation and testing of the
products described within the telecommunications systems specifications. Specifically, those
manufacturer(s) whose components constitute a component of the stnrctured cabling system(s)
installed as part ofthe voice and data transport systems. Said certification is to be such that the
Contractor is able to offer and fully comply with the requirements to provide Owner with an
extended warranty as defined in "system Warranty and Application Assurance" Article of this
Section.
D. InstallerSupervision:
ARCON 15095
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
B.
C.
D.
E.
2710A5 - 3 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
l. The selected Contractor shall provide a Project Manager to act a single point of contact for all
activities performed under this section. The Project Manager shall be a Registered
Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). The RCDD shall have a minimum of 3 years
experience in design and installation. The designer must have sufficient experience in this type
project(s) as to be able to lend adequate technical suppoft to the field forces during installation,
during the warranfy period and during any extended warranty periods or maintenance contracts.
The Contractor must attach a resume of the responsible designer to the Contractor's response for
evaluation.
2. The Project Manager, or designee thereof, shall be required to attend project meetings as required
until proj ect closeout/signoff.
3. Should the Project Manager assigned to this project change during the installation, the new Project
Manager assigned must meet all qualifications stated in this section, and must also submit a resume
for review by the Owner.
4. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the Project Manager does not possess adequate qualifications to
suppor-t the project, the Owner reseryes the right to require the Contractor to assign a designer
whom, in the Owner's opinion, possesses the necessary skills and experience required of this
project.
E. Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production ofthe required type ofmaterial or equipment for at least five years (unless specifically
exempted by the Owner) and shall be the manufacturer's latest design with published properties.
F. Source Limitations: Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same manufacture
throughout the project to provide uniform appearance, operation and maintenance.
G. Equipment and materials shall be without blemish or defect.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in City of Chicago
Electrical Code, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
I. Comply with NFPA 70 for abandoned cabling.
1.07 DELMRY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not deliver or install equipment frames and ladder rack until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.
C. Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and
items shall be placed so that they are protected fiom damage and deterioration.
D. Stage materials in a secure area of the project site until installation.
r.O8 FTBER OPTIC CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Optical fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between MDF and the IDF and
Concentrator Enclosures in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of
backbone cables, intermediate, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for
backbone-to-equipment connections.
1.09 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the
communications outleVconnector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the MDF and/or the IDF.
This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing
protocols.
l. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is determined by the communications area serving that
link, as follows:
ARCON 15095
DATA . INSIDE-PI.ANT
271045.4 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
1. For horizontal cabling served from a Concentrator Enclosure, the maximum allowable length is 141
feet (43 meters).
2. For horizontal cabling served directly from the MDF <or from IDFP, the maximum allowable
length is 295 feet (90 meters).
a. The maximum allowable lengths do not include an allowance for patch cords
I.IO PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA/EIA-568-C.2, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
I.11 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The warranfy specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under other requirements of the Contract
Documents.
l. Provide a minimum one (1) year warranty for all parts and labor provided under this electrical
specifications for all components not covered under the Special Warranty provisions of this Article.
B. The Contractor shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all telecommunications equipment, cabling and
components meet or exceed specifications.
C. Special Warranty: Provide to Owner an Exlended System and Application Assurance Warranty covering
product and installation defects for all passive manufactured components of the structured cabiing
system(s) installed as part of the voice and data transport systems. Passive components are defined as
those exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. Warrant to Owner the following:1. The passive products that comprise the telecommunications structured cabling system will be free
from manufacturing defects in material or workmanship under normal and p.Jp". use.2. All approved passive cabling products that comprise the structured cablingsystem exceed the
specification standards and will conform to the performance specificationioithe associated product
data sheet in effect at the time the product is utilized.3. The installation will meet, if not exceed, the requirements and the standards for cabling
configurations specified in these standards.4' The Special Warranfy shall provided an application assurance guaranteeing structured cabling
system shall be capable of running a minimum of Gigabit Ethernet (l000Mbs) in the horizontal
channel, and I 0-Gigabit Ethernet ( I 0,000Mbs) in the backbone.5. The Special Warranty shall be applicable to the original site of installation. Under the warranty, themanufacturer will either repair or replace the defective product itself at the manufacturer,s cost, or
the manufacturer will pay an authorized reseller for the cost to repair or replace any such defectiveproduct on behalf of the manufacturer.
6. Transfer manufacturer's warranties to the Owner in addition to the General System Guarantee.
Submit these warranties on each item in list form with shop drawings. Detaii specific parts within
equipment that are subject to separate conditional warranty. Warranty proprietary equipment and
systems involved in this contract during the guarantee period. Final payment shail not relieve
Contractor of these obligations.
7. Special Warranfy shall be held by the product manufacturer(s).8. Special Warranty Period: 25 years from date of acceptance.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. CATEGORY 6e UTP CABLE AND CONNECTING HARDWARE (plenum)l. Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Cable: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6E cableb. Panduit GenSpeed 6500 premium Category 6E cablec. BerkTek Lanmark 2000 Category 6E cable
ARCON 15095
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
2710A5 - 5 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
2. Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Connecting Hardware and Patch Cords: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6 Connectivity
b. Panduit TX6 PLUS Category 6 Connectivity
c. Ortronics Clarity 6 Series Connectivity
d. Ortronics Inc., Clarity6 series components
2.02 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data communications,
including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets, and
outlets.
1. Comply with T14-568 (cabling) and TIA-569 (pathways), latest editions (commercial standards).2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and T1,{-6 07 and are UL listed or
third parfy independent testing laboratory certified.3. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under
raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.
B' Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating horizontal cables
that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to extern-al service provider.l. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 25 percent
spare space.
C' Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support structures for terminating horizontal cables that exlendto telecommunications outlets.
1' Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings.
D' Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediate distribution
frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with main distribution frame
at center hub ofstar.
E' Cabling to outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located atcenter hub ofstar; also referred to as "links".
2.03 PATHWAYS
A- conduit: As specified in Section 260534; provide pull cords in all conduit.
B. Underground Service Entrance: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (pVC) conduit, Schedule 40.
2.04 COPPERCABLE AND TERMINATIONS
A. Data Cabling
1. Horizontal Data
a. Cable
l) Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twistedpair (UTP), 24 AwG,_100 ohm; 4 individually rwisted pairs; covered with brue jacket
and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-56gand[ 444.
(a) Provide NFPA 70 rype CMp plenum-rated cable.b. Jacks and Connectors
l) RI-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulation displacement connectors; highimpact thermoplastic housing; complying with same standard as specified horizontal
cable and LL 1863.
(a) Color: Blue
(1) Color: Front face ofjack shall be colored. Use ofa color-coded icon insert on
a neutral-colorjack shall not be acceptable.(b) Performance: 500 mating cycles.(c) Data Jacks: 4-pair. pre-wired to T5684 configuration, with color-coded indications
for T5688 configuration.
ARCON 1509s
DATA - INSIDE-PI-ANT
271005 .6 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
B. Category 6 UTP: Patch Cords: Factory-made. four-pair cables terminated with eight-position modular
plug at each end.
l. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6
performance.
a. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.
b. Jack Modules shall comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2.
2. Patch Cord plug modules shall comply with ANSVTIA-968-A requirements. Patch cords shall be of
same manufacturer and consistent with components and performance level of cross-listed solutions
indicated in this Article.
3. Color: Coordinate with UTP cable color per system application.
4. Quantify to be provided:
a. Work Area: Provide one ( 1 ) 6-ft patch cord for each Category 6 UTP outlet installed per
system application.
b. Equipment End:
l) Data Racks:
(a) Provide (l) 5-ft patch cord for one-half(fifty-percent) ofthe total number of
Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application.
(b) Provide (l) 7-ft patch cord for one-half(fifty-percent) ofthe total number of
Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application.
5. Delivery & Turn-over: Notify District Sr. Infrastructure Manager when patch cords have been
delivered to project site. Deliver patch cords to site at least one week prior to substantial
completion and store in locked, secure MDF room, or other locked, secure room as coordinated
with Owner, until tum-over to district information technology manager persomel. Contractor is
responsible for all patch cords until direct turn-over to district information technology manager.
2.05 TDENTIFICATIONPRODUCTS
A. Comply with T1,4.-606.
2.06 CROSS-CONNECTTON EQUIPMENT
A. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard l9 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch
thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit
board interface.
l. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be terminated;
maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.
a. Category rating to match category ofspecifiedjack (see horizontal cabling).
b. Jack color shall match the color ofspecified userjack (see horizontal cabling).
2. Capacity: Provide ports suflicient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.
3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively;
comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.
4. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.
5. Provide full height (min 2U) patch cord organizers for each patch panel
a. Minimum 2U height
b. Panel material: 16 ga cold-rolled stee
c. cover mateiral: 16 ga cold-rolled steel
d. fung: 0.225" diamter steel road
e. Black power coat
f. Front and rear rings
g. Front and rear cover
6. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for patch panel port.
2.07 LABEL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacfurers:
1. Brady Corporation
ARCON 15095 271005 -7 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PI.ANT
2. 3M
3. Panduit Corporation
B. Cable/wire markers shall be self adhesive, self laminating mechanically printed with a clear protective
laminating over wrap or protective heat-shrink tubing.
C. Comply with TIA./EIA-606-A and LIL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DELryERY AND STORAGE
A. Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and
items shall be placed so that they are protected from damage and deterioration.
B. Stage materials in a secure area of the project site until installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. The drawings for work under telecommunications specification sections related to communication
systems are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general
arrangement of outlets, equipment, termination hardware, fixtures and other work included in the
Contract.
B. Location of items required b1' the drawings or specifications not definitely fixed by dimensions are
approximate only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be
determined at the site and shall be subject to the approval of the Owner.
C. Follow drawings in laying out work, check drawings of other trades to verifu spaces in which work will
be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points.
1. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Owner shall be notified before
proceeding with installation.
2. Minor rerouting and changes in location shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Coordinate the mounting heights of communications equipment and raceways to clear the opening
heights ofdoors and the heights ofequipment which needs to be removed and replaced.
4. As necessary, adjust elevations of rack-mounted termination hardware and horizontal wire
management panels so as to compensate for rack unit sizes of actual hardware used, as compared to
hardware rack unit sizes depicted in Contract Drawings.
D. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
E. Perform all work in cooperation and coordination with other trades and schedule.
F. Furnish other trades advance information on locations and sizes offrames, boxes, sleeves and openings
needed for the work, routes for conduit, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to
permit trades affected to install their work properly and without delay.
G. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall
assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit
and revise coordinated shop drawings.
H. With the approval of the Owner and without additional cost to the Owner. make minor modifications in
the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other trades or for proper
execution of the work.
I. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such
other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as
directed by the Owner.
J. Minor changes in the locations of outlets, fixtures and equipment shall be made prior to rough in at the
direction of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Contractor shall cooperate with other trades and coordinate work so that conflicts with other work are
eliminated.
ARCON 15095 271005.8 STRUCTURED CABLING FORVOICEAND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
L.
M.
Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Ready accessibiliry to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving
other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Contractor shall verifu measurements.
Discrepancies shall be brought to the Owner's attention for interpretation.
Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus
furnished under this Division, and notif, the Owner accordingly. In the event of failure to give sufficient
notice in time to alrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of providing such
openings thereafter.
Location of communication outlets and raceway pathways are approximate and exact locations shall be
determined on site.
Contractor shall refer to contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale drawings.
Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements.
Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with T14-607 and NFpA 70.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
l. ComplywithNECA l.
2. General Requirements for Cabling:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
ob.
h.
i.
j.
k.
N.
o.
P.
a.
R.
Comply with TIA,IEIA-5 68-C.2.
Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination practices."
Install I10-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only
at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables not more than 6 inches from cabinets,
boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, fiames, and terminals. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.
Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than 4X cable diameter. Instill lacing bars and
distribution spools.
Hook and loop (Velcro)-style cable ties shall be used to bundle and secure exposed cables in
MDF/TDF rooms. Use of plastic cable ties is not permiffed.
Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
Pulling cable: comply with BICSI ITSIM, ch. 4, "puiling cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions, and do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.1) When installing in conduit, use only lubricant approved by cable manufacturer and do
not chafe or damage outerjacket.
l. Service Loops: Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, dressed and routed
neatly:
I ) At MDF/IDF frames: 60 inches, neatly installed in vertical wire manager or
accommodated by additional routing around overhead ladder rack runway.2\ At Surface Raceway Outlets - Copper: l2 inches, neatly installed in surface raceway
channel.
3. UTP Cable Installation:
a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2.
b. Maintain pair twists as close as possible to point of termination, but do not untwist UTp cables
more than 1/8 (.125) inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.c' Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area of the
enclosure so as to inhibit the installation of network electronics.
ARCON 1s09s
DATA - INSIDE-PI-ANT
271005 - 9 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
d. MDF/IDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and
vertical cable guides to terminating hardware.
4. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
5. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:
a. Comply with TIA,/EIA-568-C.3.
b. Cables shall terminate with LC-type connectors secured in connecting hardware that is rack or
enclosure mounted.
c. Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area ofthe
enclosure so as to inhibit the installation of network electronics.d. MDFiIDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and
vertical cable guides to terminating hardware.6. Separation from EMI Sources:
a. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA,{EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and
data communication cable fiom potential EMI sources, including electrical powlr lines and
equipment.
b. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:l) Electrical EquipmenrRatingLess Than 2kyA: A minimum of 5 inches.2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of l2 inches.3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kvA: A minimum of 24 inches.c' Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshieldedpower lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:l) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than2 kVA: A minimum of 2-ll2inches.2) Electrical Equipmenr Rating between2 and,5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kvA: A minimum of 12 inches.d' Separation befween communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power linesand electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be asfollows:
I ) Electricar Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kvA: No requirement.2) Electrical Equipment Rating between2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kvA: A minimum of 6 inches.e' Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVAor HP and Larger: A minimum of 4g inches.f' Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5inches.
INSTALLATION OF CABINET RACKS AND ENCLOSURES1. ComplywithNECA 1.
2' Install all communicatio-ns hardware components in accordance with project specifications and plan,elevation, and layout information within Contract Drawings.3' The contractor shall coordinate the installation ofcommunications cabinets, racks and enclosureswith the installation ofthe communications pathways and cabling to eliminate any potential damageto cables, or any other installed communications components or-equipment.4' Backboards: Install pllrvood with "A" side outward and at elevationand wall location(s) asindicated in ContractDrawings. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners.Cover fire-rating mark during painting. Remove cover afterwards, Ieaving marf exposed forsubsequent inspection by authority having jurisdiction.5' Communications Floor-mounted Racks: Assemble and install in accordance with manufacturer,sinstructions and recommendations. Racks shall be assembled such that mounting rails are exactlyperpendicular to the base.
a' Secure to floor utilizing lag bolts or masonry anchors, and washers, appropriate to applicationand flooring condition. The use of a Tapcon, or equal, masonry screw with washer is notacceptable. Secure at all four locations ofrack base.
ARCON 15095
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
271005 - 1O STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
b. Secure each communications floor-mounted rack to overhead ladder rack using
eack-to-runway mounting plates, brackets, j-bolts, nuts/washers, etc., installed in compliance
with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
6. Wire management panels: Secure to communication relay racks in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 PATHWAYEXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
l. Verifu proposed routes ofpathways. Check raceways, ladder racks, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation,
and other conditions affecting installation. Verifo that cabling can be installed complying with EMI
clearance requirements.
2. Prepare wall penetrations and verif,that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using products
labeled for fype of wall penetrated.
3. Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verifu weight of individual
types and sizes ofcables. Verif, that load capacity ofcable support structures is adequate for each
pathway.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least l8 inches below finish grade; encase in at least 3
inches thick concrete for at least 60 inches out from the building line.
B. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:l. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and
uninterruptible power systems.
2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high fiequency lighting fixtures.4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.
C. Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260534:
D. Conduit:
l. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initiaily instalred.3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where
specifically indicated to be exposed.
a- Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and
telecommunications rooms.
b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as ifexposed to view.c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural
members.
d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal
penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.
E. Cable Routing
1' All cabling to re routed within approved raceway or above lay-in ceiling. Cabling shall be hidden
by ceiling or raceway in all locations of the building with the exception of IDF
"na
lOp rooms or
as otherwise noted on the drawings.
a. Where cable tray is provided, route cabling within cable tray.b. Where conduit sleeve is provided, route cabling within conduit sleevec. Above lay-in ceilings, where cable tray or conduit sleeves are not available:
I ) Where raceway for cabling is not provided, Contractor shall run cabling through Erico
Cablecat 2" J hooks.
(a) J hooks shall be directly attached to building structure at a maximum of 4'-0"
center-to-center.
ARCON 15095
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
271005 - 11 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
(b) Additional J hooks will be added as necessary to limit the maximum cable catenary
(cable sag) to 12" maximum.
(c) Install tye-wraps around all J hooks upon completion ofcable pulls.
(d) J hook cable density shall not exceed 600/o ofthe maximum cable count suggested
by manufacture. If necessary, provide additional level of J hooks for high cable
density runs.
(e) Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware (threaded rod, unistrut, etc.)
Necessary to solidly mounted, complete cable raceway system.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Utilize an approved firestop assembly to seal all cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies. Assembly must achieve the same smoke/fire-resistance rating as the floor or wall being
penetrated.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
C. Comply with TIA,EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
D. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.06 GROUNDING
A. lnstall grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
C. Coordinate location of communications grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG
equipment grounding conductor.
E. Bond each segment of ladder rack runway using bonding straps. Ladder rack connection fittings are not
considered an acceptable bonding mechanism. Install bonding straps in accordance with manufacturer,s
instructions and recommendations.
F. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar in MDF [or IDF], using not smaller
than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.
1. Ground ladder rack system to communications grounding bus bar.2. Ground each floor-mounted rack to communications grounding bus bar. Bonding to overhead
ladder rack is not a permissible.
3. Ground each concentrator enclosure to communications grounding bus bar. At enclosure, terminate
equipment grounding conductor to grounding bus bar located within enclosure.
G. ESD Port Kit: Install ESD port kit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations,
on communications mounting elements as follows:
1. Floor-mounted racks: Mount a kit directly to both the front and the rear sides of the right vertical
mounting rail of the center most rack in MDF [and the center most rack in IDF], at 48" above floor,
using thread-forming screw and antioxidant compound. Coordinate exact location with Owner.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. All labeing standards will be determined in conjuction with the district information technology
administrator. The district technology administrator shall have final approval on all labeling schemes.
Labeling schemes applied without approval shall be replaced/modified to comply.
B. Labeling shall minimually comply with EIA/TIA labeling standards.
C. LABELING HIERARCHT'
1. When labeling communications cabling and pathways always begin the labeling scheme with the
room or location ofgreater significance.
2. Consult with district Sr. Infrastructure Manager for clarifications regarding application of hierarchy
table to the project. Hierarchy relationships that must be adhered to include, but are not limited to:a. Cabling and/or pathways between the MDF and any IDFs must list the MDF first.
b. Cabling and/or pathways between a concentrator enclosure and the work area must list the
concentrator enclosures fi rst.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 12 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
c. Cabling and/or pathways between an MDF or IDF and a wireless access point outlet must list
the MDF or IDF first.
3. Labeling must be the same on both ends of the cable and/or pathway.
4. Labeling for all communications infrastructure elements shall be consistent across the installation.
Coordinate with requirements for labels and identification defined in Contract Drawings.
D. WIRE IDENTIFICATION
l. Cable/wire markers shall be installed within four (4) inches of each end of the cable, and where
cable is accessible in junction or pull boxes. Information list on cable/wire marker shall include,
but is not limited to:
a. Cable and type
b. Terminationhardware
c. Terminationposition
2. Identification within Connector Fields in MDF, [IDFs,] and concentrator enclosures: Label each
connector and each discrete unit ofcable-terminating and connecting hardware.
E. WORKSTATIONLABELING
1. Administration at the work area / workstation will be carried out in proximiry to the closest
Distribution Frame (MDF, IDF).
2. The administration of the individual DatalVoice locations will reference the MDF or ID room
location.
3. Administration of the individual jack locations will be used for local tracking or tracing of the patch
panel termination points (DatalVoice jacks back to the closest termination in the Distribution
Frame). Typical numbering of the jack locations will begin with the termination point closest to the
Distribution Frame and continuing in numerical series outward from that location.
3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit
communications systems installation, including all pathway elements and supports necessary for same.
Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. Perform work so as to not impair structural
stability of building construction and systems.
B. Conduits passing through roofs or other surfaces exposed to weather shall be properly flashed as
specified in roofing and waterproofing sections. This flashing work shall be part of this division of work.
C. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
Install new firestopping where existing firestopping has been disturbed during the course of install.
Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.09 REFINISHTNG AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section
"Painting."
l. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the
degree ofdamage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacfurer.
3.10 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation inspect exposed finishes. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction
debris. Repair damaged finish(es). including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. All equipment, hardware and finishes shall be cleaned priorto final acceptance. Unless otherwise
indicated, clean shall mean free of dust, dirt, mud. debris, oil, grease, residues, and contamination.
C. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes. and cabinets
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Protect conduit and wireway
ARCON 15095
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
271005 - 13 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps. Cover fixtures, materials,
equipment and devices fumished or installed under this section or otherwise protect against damage, both
before and after installation. Hardware, materials, equipment, or devices damaged prior to final
acceptance ofthe work shall be restored to their original condition or replaced.
D. During the course of communications installation work, provide for on-going proper disposal of all
debris, including but not limited to: equipment packaging and shipping materials, shipping pallets, empty
cable reels/boxes, cable cuttings. etc. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site free from
accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by its employees or work. Remove all crates, cartons,
and other waste materials or trash from the working areas at the end of each working day. Flammable
waste material must be removed from the working areas at the time of generation. All rubbish and debris,
combustible or not, shall be discarded in covered metal containers daily and removed fiom the premises
at least weekly and legally disposed of.
3.11 COMMISSIONING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. INSPECTION
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL ceftification markings.
Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with coloricoding
for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with im,ttA-56g-8'.1.2' Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, outlet/connectors. and patch panels for horizontal
UTP cabling for Data/Wireless, Kronos and MMTV applications.3' Visually confirm Category 5e marking of outlets, outlet/connectors, termination blocks and patch
panels for horizontal UTP cabling voice and 2i-pair Category 5e backbone applications.4' Visually confirm Category 3 marking of copper backbone UTP cables for indoor voice backbone
applications.
5' Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch
cords, and labeling ofall components.6. Inspect cable terminations for coror coded labels of proper type.
B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
l. Perform tests and inspections.
2. Copper UTP Cable Tests:
a. Copper UTp Test Instruments:
l) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in T1A,{EIA-56g-B.2.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test
Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in
"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords anjadapters that arequalified by test equipment manufacturer for permanent link test configuration.2) For horizontal UTP cable certification tests, use a Level III tester.b. Copper Backbone UTp Cable Tests:
1) Test copper backbone UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent
faults, polarity between conductors, and for insertion loss (attenuatior). i"rt operation
of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not
cross-connection.
c. UTP Performance Tests:
I ) Test permanent link for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to
TIA/EfA-568-8. I and TIA,/EIA-568-8.2:
(a) Wire map.
(b) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).(c) Insertion loss.
(d) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
(e) Power sum near-end crosstalk (pSNEXT) loss.(0 Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
(g) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
(h) Return loss.
ARCON 15095
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
271005 - 14 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
3.
(i) Propagation delay.
0) Delay skew.
2) Testing for Category 6 horizontal UTP must additionally report values for
attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (ACR), and power sum attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
(PSACR).
3) A star 1**"; passing shall not be considered acceptable.
Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Optical Fiber Test Instruments:
1) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA,EIA-568-B.1. Use
only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for
channel or link test configuration.
b. Optical Time Domain Reflectometry Tests: After terminating optical fiber cables, one
individual fiber from each backbone cable installed shall be tested using an optical time
domain reflectometer (OTDR). Perform OTDR testing in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended test procedures. Test to determine the installed length, continuity, and
OTDR-based attenuation measurement. Provide test report identifying backbone cable
identification and indicating corresponding values from tests.
c. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to
TIA/EIA-S68-8. 1 and TIA/EIA-568-8.3.
1) Multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in both directions
according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.2) Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in
TIA/EIA-568-8.I.
3) These readings must not be higher than the "Optimal Attenuation Loss (OAL)". The
OAL will be calculated using the manufacturer's factory certified test results, (db/km)
adjusted for the actual installed lengths (dBs) plus the manufacturer's best published
attenuation losses for the connector on this project and/or splice installed on this project
(0.25dB for Connectors and 0.lOdB for splices).4) Link End-to-End Attenuation Test reports shall include:(a) Cable identification and Strand numbers
(b) The OAL value for each link
(c) The theoretical maximum attenuation value, per TIA,{EIA-j68-8.1, for each link(d) Tested values for attenuation
Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that
is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to thi
computer, saved as tex files, and printed and submitted.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective ifit does not pass tests and inspections. Correct
failures and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new components
and retest to demonstration compliance with requirements.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 27IOO5
4.
6.
ARCON 15095
DATA . INSIDE.PLANT
271005 - 15 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
ATTACHMENT C
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
ATTACHMENT C
LIST OF DRAWINGS
DATE LAST
REVISEDSHEET NOS. SHEET TITLES
G0.1 Cover Sheet
A0.1 Demo Floor & Ceiling Plan
A1.0 Composite Floor Plan
A1.1 Floor Plan & Ceiling Plan
M.\ Schedules & Details
A9.1 Floor Finish Plan
El.1 Electrical Plan and Schedules
02t18t2016
0211812016
02118120t6
0211812016
0211812016
02118120t6
0211812016
-1-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
ATTACHMENT D
SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope
to this project.
2. Work hours are 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Any deviation is subject
to the approval of the Village representative.
3. The project will be done on consecutive work days, excluding weekends and holidays
observed by the Village, until completed, delays only to inclement weather.
4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and
schedule required inspections through Community Development.
5. The Contractor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where he/she can be reached
after normal working hours.
6. The Contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used
on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work
beginning.
7. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scaffolding shall be mutually agreed upon
between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. The
Contractor must deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store
material on raised platforms and cover material with protective covering.
8. Before work is started, Contractor must deliver to the job site sufficient material to
complete the project.
g. If a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed
upon between the Village and the contractor.
10. All ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained in prior working order during the course
of this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday.
1 1. Contractor must provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not injure anyone,
and to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow'"CAUTION" tape will
be placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to warn the public of
people working overhead.
ATTACHMENT D
12. At all times, Contractor must keep the work and storage areas in a clean, orderly, and a
picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate
vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas
will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into
dumpster will be removed from the site.
13. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining
material and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72
hours of completion.
14. Upon completion the Contractor shall supply a one year warranty covering material and
workmanship; contractor shall submit sample warranty with bid.
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK ROOM RENOVATION PROJECT
APPENDIX 1
Cook Countv Prevailine Wage for Julv 2015
(See explanation of column headings at bottom of wages)
Trade Name
Trng
RG TYP C Base FRMAN M-F>8 OSA OSH H/W pensn Vac
ASBESTOS ABT-GEN
0.500
ASBESTOS ABT-MEC
0.120
BOILERMAKER
0.400
BRICK MASON
1.030
CARPENTER
0. 630
CEMENT MASON
0.480
CERAM]C TILE FNSHER
a.'710
39.400 39.950 1.5
36.340 38.840 1.5
41.010 51.300 2.0
43.780 48.160 1.5
44.350 46.350 1.5
43.750 45.150 2.0
36.810 0.000 1.5
40.000 42.800 1.5
46.100 51.100 1.5
37.050 52.500 1.5
47.500 52.500 1.5
45.000 48.000 1.5
50.800 57.150 2.0
3'7.340 39.340 1.5
40.500 42.000 1.5
48.450 50.950 1.5
44.200 46.2A0 2.0
L -5 2.0 13. 98 10.72 0.000
7.5 2.0 11.47 1A.96 0.000
2.0 2.0 6.970 18.13 0.OOO
1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 O.OO0
1.5 2.0 t_1.'79 1.6.39 0.000
1.5 2. 0 13.05 14.45 0.000
t.5 2.0 10.55 9.230 O. OOO
1.5 2.0 8.610 12.57 1.100
7.5 2. 0 10 .16 74. 87 O. OO0
2.0 2. 0 8. 630 72.28 O. OOO
2.0 7.5 11.06 15.75 O. O0O
t.5 2.0 13.83 15.27 O.000
2.0 2.0 13.51 74.2! 4.060
7.5 2.0 13.05 :-2.06 0.000
2.0 2. 0 13.14 16. 99 O. OOO
1.5 2.0 11.47 12.16 0.000
2.0 2.0 13 .65 2:-.14 O. O0o
ALL
BLD
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
BLD
COMM. ELECT. BLD
0.750
ELECTR]C PWR EQMT OP ALL
0. 4 60
ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL
0.370
ELECTR]C PWR LINEMAN ALL
0.480
ELECTRICIAN
1.000
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR
0.600
EENCE ERECTOR
0.300
GLAZIER
0.940
HT/FROST INSULATOR
0 .12A
IRON WORKER
0.350
ALL
BLD
ALL
BLD
BLD
ALL
APPENDIX 1
LABORER ALL 39.200 39. 950 1.5 1.5 2.0 13. 98 10 .12 0.000
0.500
LATHER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1,.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000
0. 630
MACHTNTST BLD 45.350 47. 850 1.5 1.5 2.0 1 .260 8. 950 1.850
0.000
MARBLE ETNTSHERS ALL 32.400 34.320 7.5 r.5 2.0 10.05 13.75 0.000
0 .620
MARBLE MASON BLD 43.030 47.330 1.5 t.5 2.0 10.05 14 . 10 0.000
0.780
MATERTAL TESTER r ALL 29.200 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 70.'72 0.000
0.500
MATERTALS TESTER rr ALL 34.200 0. 000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13. 98 10.72 0.000
0.500
MTLLWRTGHT ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1,.5 2.0 13.29 76.39 0.000
0. 630
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD l_ 48.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
L .250
OPERATING ENGTNEER BLD 2 46.800 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17 -55 72.65 1.900
L .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 3 44.250 52.740 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
I .250
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 4 42.500 52.700 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
7 .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 5 51.850 52.1,00 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 1,2.65 1.900
I .250
oPERATING ENGTNEER BLD 6 49.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
7 .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 7 51.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 72.65 1.900
T atrn
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER FLT 1 53. 600 53. 600 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.10 11.80 1.900
I .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER FLT 2 52.L00 53.600 1.5 1..5 2.0 17.10 11.05 1.900
I atrn
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER FLT 3 46.400 53.600 1.5 7.5 2.0 17. 10 11.80 1. 900
I .250
OPERATTNG ENGINEER FLT 4 38.550 53. 600 1.5 1 -5 2.0 17. 10 11.80 1. 900
L .250
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER FLT 5 55. 100 53. 600 1.5 7.5 2. 0 17. 10 11.80 1. 900
T AtrA
oPERATING ENGINEER FLT 6 35.000 35.000 1.5 t.5 2.0 16.60 11.05 1.900
I .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 1 46.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
L .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 2 45.750 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17 .55 12. 65 1. 900
I .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 3 43.700 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
t .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 4 42 -300 50.300 1.5 1..5 2.0 17 .55 t2. 65 1. 900
t .250
oPERATTNG ENGINEER HWy 5 41.100 50.300 1.5 7.5 2.0 17.55 72.65 1.900
1 )\O
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 6 4 9.300 50.300 1.5 7.5 2.0 17 .55 12. 65 1. 900
t .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 7 47.300 50.300 1.5 7.5 2.0 t] .55 12.55 1.900
r atrn
APPENDIX 1
ORNAMNTL rRON WORKER ALL 45.000 47 .500 2.A 2.A 2.0 13 .55 t1 .94 0.000
0.650
PA]NTER
0 -110
PAINTER SIGNS
0.000
P]LEDR]VER
0. 630
PIPEFITTER
1.780
PLASTERER
t-024
PLUMBER
0.880
ROOFER
0.530
SHEETMETAL WORKER BLD 42.230 45.610 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.53 20.68 0.000
0.120
ALL 41.750 46.500 1.5 1.5 1.5 11.50 11.10 0.000
BLD 33.920 38.090 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.600 2.710 0.000
AL], 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000
BLD 46.000 49.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.000 15.8s 0.000
BLD 43.430 4 6.040 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.05 14 .43 0.000
BLD 46.650 48.650 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.18 11.46 0.000
BLD 41.000 44.000 1.5 7.5 2.0 8.280 10.54 0.000
ALL 42.0'7A 44.010 2.4 2.0 2.0 13.45 19.59 0.000
BLD 43.780 48.160 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 0.000
BLD 41.880 44.880 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 1,2.51 0.000
BLD 43.840 47 .840 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.55 11.40 0.000
E ALL 1 35.480 35.680 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.350 10.50 0.000
E ALL 2 34.100 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000
E ALL 3 34.300 34.500 1.5 t.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000
E ALL 4 34.500 34.500 1.5 7.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000
w ALL 1 35. 600 35.800 1.5 1.5 1.5 8. 250 9.140 0.000
w ALL 2 32.700 33. 100 1.5 1.5 2. 0 6. s00 4 .350 0.000
r,11 ALL 3 32.900 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000
w ALL 4 33.100 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.s00 4.350 0.000
BLD 43.800 44.800 1.5 t.5 2.0 8.280 13.49 0.000
SIGN HANGER
0.000
SPRTNKLER FrrrER BLD 49.200 51.200 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.15 9.650 0.000
0.550
BLD 31.310 33. 810 1 .5 1.5 2.0 4.8s0 3.280 0.000
STEEL ERECTOR
0.350
STONE MASON
1.030
SURVEY WERKER -> NOT IN EFFECT ALL 37.OOO 37.750 1.5 I.5 2.0
1.2.9'7 9.930 0.000 0.500
TERRAZZO FTNTSHER BLD 38.040 0. 000 1.5 7.5 2.0 10.55 11 .22 0.000
0.124
TERRAZZO MASON
0.940
TILE MASON
0.990
TRAFFTC SAFETY WRKR HWy 32.150 34.350 1.5 L.5 2.0 6.550 6.450 0.000
0.500
TRUCK DRIVER
0.150
TRUCK DRIVER
0.150
TRUCK DRIVER
0.150
TRUCK DR]VER
0. 150
TRUCK DRTVER
0. 150
TRUCK DRIVER
0.000
TRUCK DRIVER
0.000
TRUCK DRIVER
0. 000
TUCKPOlNTER
0.670
Legend: Rc (Region)
TYP (Trade Ty?e - AIl,Highway,Buil,ding,Floating,oil & Chip.Rivers)
APPENDIX 1
C (Class)
Base (Base wage Rate)
FRMAN (Foreman Rate)
M-F>8 (OT reguired for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Eri.
OSA (Overtime (OT) is required for every hour worked on Saturday)
OSH (Overtime is requrred for every hour worked on Sunday and Holidays)
H/w (Health & vlelfare lnsurance)
Pensn (Pension)
vac (vacation)
Trng (Training)
Explanations
COOK COUNTY
The foll-owing list is considered as those days for which holiday rates
of wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day,
Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and
Veterans Day in some cfassifj-cations/counties. Generally, any of
these holidays which faIl on a Sunday is cefebrated on the following
Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the
appropriate overtime rate for hol-iday pay. Common practice in a gi,ven
local- may alter certain days of cefebration. If in doubt, please
check with IDOL.
TRUCK DRIVERS (WEST) - That part of the county West of Barrington
Road.
EXPLANATION OF CLASSES
ASBESTOS - GENERAL - remova] of asbestos materlal/mofd and hazardous
materials from any place in a buil-ding, includi-ng mechanical systems
where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This incfudes the
removal- of asbestos material-s/mol-d and hazardous materials from
ductwork or pi-pes i-n a bui1ding when the buildlng is to be demolished
at the time or at some cl-ose future date.
ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - remova] of asbestos materiaf from mechanical-
systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boifers, where the mechanical-
systems are to remain.
CERAMIC TILE FINISHER
The grouting, cleaning, and polishlng of all- classes of til-e, whether
for interior or exterior purposes, afl- burned, glazed or ungJ-azed
products; afl composition materials, granite til-es, warning detectable
tiles, cement tifes, epoxy composite materlafs, pavers, glass,
mosaics, fiberglass, and a]1 substitute materials, for til-e made in
til-e-l-ike unj-ts; afl mixtures in tife like form of cement, metals, and
other materials that are for and intended for use as a finished ffoor
surface, stai-r treads, promenade roofs, walks, wa11s, ceilings,
swimming poo1s, and all other places where tife is to form a finished
interior or exterj-or. The mixing of all setting mortars including but
not limited to thj-n-set mortars, epoxies, wa11 mud, and any other
sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation,
installation, repair, or maintenance of til-e and/or simil-ar materiafs.
The handling and unloading of all sand, cement, lime, t11e,
fixtures, equi-pment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used i-n
the preparation, instalfation, repair, or maintenance of til-e and/or
simil-ar materiafs. Cerami-c Til-e Finishers shal-l fifl al-l ;oj-nts and
APPENDIX 1
voids regardl-ess of method on al-l- tife work, particularly and
especially after instal-l-ation of said tlle work. Application of any
and al-l- protective coverings to all types of til-e instal-l-ations
including, but not be limited to, all soap compounds, paper products,
tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masoni-te, cardboard,
and any new type of products that may be used to protect tlle
install-ations, Bl-astrac equipment, and afl- floor scarifying equipment
used in preparing fl-oors to receive tile. The cl-ean up and removal of
al-l- waste and materials. All- demoliti-on of exlsting tile fl-oors and
wall-s to be re-tiled.
COMMUN]CATIONS ELECTRIC]AN
rnstallation, operation, inspecti-on, maintenance, repair and serviceof radio, televislon, recording, voice sound vision production andreproduction, telephone and telephone interconnect, facsimil-e, dataapparatus, coaxia.l-, fibre optic and wj-rel-ess equipment, appJ_iances andsystems used for the transmission and reception of signals of anynature/ business, domestic, commercial, education, entertainment, andresidential purposes, including but not l_imited to, communication andtelephone, electronic and sound equipment, fibre optic and data
communicati-on systems, and the performance of any task directlyrel-ated to such instafl-atj-on or service whether at new or existingsites, such tasks to incl-ude the pracing of wire and cable ande.Iectrical power conduit or other raceway work within the equipmentroom and pulling wire and/or cabl-e through conduit and theinstall-ation of any incidental- conduj-t, such that the employeescovered hereby can complete any job in ful_l.
MARBLE F]NISHER
Loadi-ng and unl-oading trucks, distribution of afl- materj_al_s (al_Istone/ sand, etc.), stockj-ng of floors with material-, performing allrigging for heavy work, the handl-i-ng of al-l- material- that may ueneeded for the installation of such materiafs, buildlng ofscaffolding, polishing i-f needed, patching, waxing of materia] ifdamaged, pointlng up, caurking, grouting and creaning of marble,holding water on diamond or carborundum bl-ade or saw for setterscutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation ofmaterj-al-, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set bysetters, mix-ing up of molding plaster for instal_l-ation of materi-a1,mixing up thin set for the instal-fation of materlal, mixing up of sandto cement for the instal-l-atj-on of material- and such other work as maybe required in helping a Marbfe Setter in the handling of al-l_materlal in the erection or instaflation of lnterior marble, s1ate,travertine, art marble, serpentine, al-berene stone, blue stone,granlte and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreig.n or domesticmaterial-s as are specified and used in buil-ding interiors andexteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara,sanionyx, vitrol-ite and simi]ar opaque glass and the laying of all_marble tile, Lerrazzo tile, sl-ate tire and precast t1Ie, .i.p", riserstreads, base, or any other materi-al-s that may be used as substitutesfor any of the aforementioned material-s and which are used on interiorand exterior whi_ch are instal-l_ed i-n a simi-lar manner.
MATERTAL TESTER r: Hand coring and drilling for testing of material_s;fiel-d i-nspection of uncured concrete and asphalt.
APPENDIX I
MATERIAL TESTER I1: Fiefd inspection of we1ds, structural steel,
fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcj-ng stee1, formwork,
cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjusting
proportions of bituminous mj-xtures.
OPERATING ENGINEER - BUILDING
Cl-ass 1. Asphalt Pl-ant; Asphalt Spreader,' Autograde,' Backhoes with
Caisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers);
Boiler and Throttl-e Val-ve; Caisson Rigs; Central- Redi-Mix Plant;
Combination Back Hoe Front End-.1-oader Machine; Compressor and Throttle
Val-ve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete
Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. fL; Concrete
Paver 21E eu. ft. and Under: Concrete Pfacer; Concrete Placing Boom;
Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower,' Cranes, Afl; Cranes,
Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCI and simil-ar Type); Creter Crane; Spider
Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.,' Derricks, Al-f ; Derricks, Traveling,.
Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, EJ-evati-ng; Grouting
Machines,' Heavy Duty Self-Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover;
Highlift Shovels or Front Endl-oader 2-7/4 yd. and over; Hoists,
El-evators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists,
One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Fl-oor; Hydraulic
Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and simil-ar equipment),.
Locomotives, Al-f; Motor Patrol; Lubrication Technician; ManipuJ_ators;
Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Post Hol-e Dlgger; Pre-Stress Machine; pump
Cretes Dual Ram,' Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type pumps; Gypsum
Bul-ker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hol-e Drilt; Roto Mifl_ Gri-nder;
Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip-Form Paver,. Straddl-e Buggies,. Operation
of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom;
Trenching Machines.
Cl-ass 2. Boil-ers; Broom, Aff Power PropelJ-ed; Bulldozers; ConcreteMixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable,- Forklift Trucks;
Highlift Shovels or Front Endfoaders under 2-7/4 yd.; Holsts,
Automatic,' Hoists, Inside El-evators; Holsts, Sewer Dragglng Machine,.Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Laser Screed; Rock Drifl (Seff-propelled);
Rock Dril-I (Truck Mounted) ; Roll-ers, All-; Steam Generators; Tractors,All-,' Tractor Drawn Vibratory Rol-l-er; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame.
Cl-ass 3. Air Compressor; Combination Smal-l_ Equj-pment Operator,.
Generators; Heaters, Mechanlcal-; Hoists, rnsi-de Efevators (remodeling
or renovation work); Hydraulic Power units (pi1e Driving, Extracting,
and Drill-i.g); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, WelJ- Points; Weldrng Machines (2 through 5);
Winches, 4 Smalf Electric Dri-l,l- Winches.
cl-ass 4. Bobcats and,/or other Skid steer Loaders; oilers; and BrickForklift.
Class 5. Asslstant Craft Foreman.
CIass 6. GradalI
Class 7. Mechanics; Welders
APPENDIX 1
OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Asphalt Pl-ant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combj-nation; Asphalt
Heater Scarfj-re; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOL4ACO or other simifar
type machlnes: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Bal-last
Regulator; Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central- Redi-Mix
Pfant; Comblnation Backhoe Eront Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe
Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck
Mounted); Concrete Conveyor,' Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete
Placer; Concrete Tube Fl-oat; Cranes, aI1 attachments; Cranes, Tower
Cranes of al-f types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.;
Derricks, A11; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling,' Dredges;
El-evators, Outslde type Rack & Pinion and Simil-ar Machines; Formfess
Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader,
Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Eorm Grader, Pul-l- Grader, Subqrader; Guard
Rail- Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum,' Heavy
Duty Self-Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover,' Hydraulic Backhoes;
Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40' of boom reach; Lubrication
Technician; Manipulators; Mucking Machine; Pife Dri-vers and Skid Rig;
Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram,' Rock Dri]l - Crawfer or Skid
Rig; Rock Driff - Truck Mounted; Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mil-l-
Grlnder; SJ-ip-Form Paver; Snow Melters,' Soil- Test Dri11 Ri-g (Truck
Mounted); Straddl-e Buggies; Hydraulic Telescoping Form (Tunnel);
Operation of Tieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Beft Loader,' Tractor
Drawn Belt Loader (with attached pusher - two engineers); Tractor with
Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine;
Trenching,' Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with Boom; Raised or Blind Hofe
DriIIs (Tunnel- Shaft); Underground Boring and,/or Mining Machines 5
ft. in di-ameter and over tunnel, etc; Underground Boring and,/or Mining
Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Whee] Excavator; Wj-dener (APSCO).
Cfass 2. Batch Pl-ant; Bitumlnous Mixer; Boil-er and Throttl-e Valve;
Bul-ldozers; Car Loader Trail-ing Conveyors; Comblnation Backhoe Front
Endloader Machine (Less than l- cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with
attachments),' Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common
Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Harnmer; Concrete Grinding
Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 75 Series to and including 21 cu.
ft.; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine,
BeJ-ting Machine and Seali,ng Machine; Concrete Wheel- Saw; Conveyor Muck
Cars (Haglund or Simllar Type); Dril-l-s, Al-1; Finishing Machine -
Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endl-oader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging
Machine; Hydraulj-c Boom Trucks (All- Attachments); Hydro-Blaster; Hydro
Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; A11 Locomotives,
Dinky; Off-Road Hau1i-ng Units (j,ncluding articulating) Non
Sel-f-Loading Ejection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type
Pumps, Gypsum Bul-ker and Pump; Rol1er, Asphalt,' Rotary Snow Plows;
Rototl11er, Seaman, etc. , self -prope1led,' Self -Propelf ed Compactor,'
Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.; Scraper - Si-ngle/Twin Engine,/Push and
PutI; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Slze); Tractors
pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot, Di-sc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats.
Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, Al-l- Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender;
Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over);
Conveyor, Portabfe; Earm-Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.;
Eorklift Trucks; Groutinq Machine; Hoists, Automatic,' Hoi-sts, Al-1
El-evators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe
APPENDIX 1
JackJ-ng Machines; Post-Ho1e Digger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Drj-ven;
Pug Mi11si Rol-l-ers, other than Asphalt; Seed and Straw Bl-ower; Steam
Generators; Stump Machi-ne; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame; Work Boats;
Tamper-Eorm-Motor Driven.
Cl-ass 4. Air Compressor,' Combination - Small Eguipment Operator;
Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraullc
Power Unit (Pj-1e Drivi-ng, Extracting, or Dril1j-ng) ; Light Pfants, Al-l-
(1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300
ft.); Pumps, Well Points,' Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding
Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Smal-f Efectric Drilf Viinches.
Cl-ass 5 . SkldSteer Loader (al-t ) ; Brick Forkl-if ts; Oif ers .
Cl-ass 6. Fiefd Mechanics and Fiel-d Wel-ders
Class 7. Dowel-l Machine wj-th Air Compressor,' Gradalf and machines of
11ke nature.
OPERAT]NG ENG]NEER - FLOATING
CIass 1. Craft Foreman; Master Mechanic; Di-ver,/Wet Tender,' Engineer,'
Engineer (Hydraulic Dredge) .
C.l-ass 2. Crane/Backhoe Operator; Boat Operator with towing
endorsement; Mechanic/Wel-der; Assistant Engineer (Hydraulic Dredge) ;
Leverman (Hydraulic Dredge); Diver Tender.
Cl-ass 3. Deck Equipment Operator, Machinerl,rnan, Maintenance of Crane
(over 50 ton capacj-ty) or Backhoe (115,000 ]bs. or more); Tug/Launch
Operator; Loader/Dozer and like equipment on Barge, Breakwater Wa11,
Slip/Dock, or Scow, Deck Machj-nery, etc.
Cl-ass 4. Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman/Fireman (4 Equipment
Units or More); Off Road Trucks; Deck Hand, Tug Engineer, Crane
Maintenance (50 Ton Capacity and Under) or Backhoe Weighing (115,000
pounds or .Iess); Assistant Tug Operator.
Cl-ass 5. Friction or Lattice Boom Cranes.
Class 6. ROV Pi-fot, ROV Tender
SURVEY WORKER - Operated survey equipment lncluding data coffectors,
G.P.S. and robotic instruments, as wefl aS conventional fevels and
transits.
TERRAZZO FIN]SHER
The handl-ing of sand, cement, marble chips, and alf other material-s
that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanj-c, and the mixing,
grinding, grouti-ng, cleaning and seafing of al-l Marb]e, Mosaic, and
lerrazzo work, fl-oors, base, stai-rs, and walnscotj-ng by hand or
machine, and in additlon, assisting and aiding Marble, Masonic, and
Terrazzo Mechanics.
TRAFFIC SAFETY
APPENDIX 1
Work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce lane
usage on highway work, the insta.l-lation and removal of temporary lane
markings, and the instal-fation and removal of temporary road signs.
TRUCK DRIVER - BU]LD]NG, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTTON - EAST & WEST
Cfass 1. Two or three Axl-e Trucks. A-frame Truck when used for
transportation purposes,' Air Compressors and Welding Machines,
includj-ng those pul1ed by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors;
Ambufances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman,' Car and Truck
Washers; Carry-al-l-s,' Fork Lifts and Hoj-sters; Helpers; Mechanics
Helpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2-man operation; Pavement
Breakers; Pol-e Trailer, up to 40 feet; Power Mower Tractors;
Self-propefl-ed Chlp Spreader,' Skipman; S]urry Trucks, 2-man operation;Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters; Unskil_l_ed
Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, andportable toifets on the job site.
Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump
Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids,
Turnatrail-ers when pulling othersimilar equipment under 16 cubic
Ready-mi-x Pl-ant Hopper Operator,
Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards;
Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or
than sel-f-loading equipment or
yards,' Mixer Trucks under 7 yards,-
and Wlnch Trucks, 2 Ax1es.
Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over,.Dumpsters, Track rrucks, Euclids, Hu9 Bottom Dump Turnatrailers orturnapulls when pulling other than sel-f-roading equipment or simil_arequipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Ei_ssion MaterialTrucks,' Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile cranes whil_e in transit011 Distributors, 1-man operatj-on,' pole Trailer, over 4o feet; pofe
and Expandable Traj-rers hauling materj-al- over 5o feet long; slurrytrucks, 1-man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axl_es or more;
Mechanlc--Truck Wefder and Truck pai_nter.
Cl-ass 4. Sj-x axl-e trucks; Dual-purpose vehicl-es, such as mountedcrane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic;sel-f-l-oading equipment l-1ke P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front
Other Cl-assifications of Work:
For definltions of cl-assifications not otherwise set out, the
Department generally has on fife such definitions which areavallabl-e. rf a task to be performed is not subject to one of thecl-asslfications of pay set out, the Department wirl upon beingcontacted state which neighboring county has such a cl-assiflcation andprovide such rate, such rate being deemed to exj-st by reference inthis document. rf no neighboring county rate applies to the task,the Department shal-1 undertake a special determination, such specj-aIdeterminatlon being then deemed to have exi-sted under thisdetermi-nation. If a project requires these, or any cl-assification notlisted, please contact IDOL at 21,'7-182-1710 for wage rates orcl-arif ications.
LANDSCAPING
Landscaping work fal-1s under the exlsti-ng classiflcations for Iaborer,operating engineer and truck drj_ver. The work performed by
APPENDIX 1
landscape plantsman and landscape laborer is covered by the existing
cfassi-fication of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators
(regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by the
cfassifications of operating engj-neer. The work performed by
landscape truck drivers (regardless of size of truck driven) is
covered by the cfassifications of truck driver.
MATERIAL TESTER & MATER]AL TESTER/INSPECTOR I AND II
Notwithstanding the difference in the cl-assificati-on title, the
classification entitl-ed "Material- Tester I" invol-ves the same job
duties as the classificati-on entitl-ed "Material- Tester/Inspector I".
Likewise, the cl-assification entitled "Materi-al Tester 1f" invol-ves
the same j ob dut j-es as the cl-assif ication enti-t1ed "Material-
Du Paee Countv Prevailing Waee for Julv 2015
(See explanation of column headings at bottom of wages)
Trade Name RG TYP c Base FRMAN M-F>8 osA osH H/w pensn vac
Trna
ASBESTOS ABT-GEN ALL 39.400 39.950 1.5 7.5 2.0 13.98 10.72 O.O0O
0.500
ASBESTOS ABT-MEC BLD 36.340 38.840 1.5 1.5 2.0 11 .41 tO. 96 O. OOO
0.120
BOTLERMAKER BLD 4'7.01 0 51.300 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.970 18.13 O.OO0
0.400
BRrCK MASON BLD 43.780 48.160 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 0.000
1.030
CARPENTER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000
0.630
CEMENT MASON ALL 43.750 45.150 2.A 7.5 2. O 13.05 14.45 O. OOO
0.480
CERAMIC T]LE FNSHER BLD 36. 810 O. OOO 1.5 7.5 2. O 10.55 9.230 O. OOO
0 .11A
COMMUNTCATTON TECH BLD 32.65A 34 .750 1.5 7.5 2. O 9.550 15.16 1.250
0.610
ELECTRTC pWR EQMT Op ALL 37.890 51.480 1.5 7.5 2.0 5.000 11.75 O.O0O
0.380
ELECTRIC pWR EQMT Op HWy 39.220 53.290 1.5 7.5 2.0 5. OOO 12.71 0.000
0.390
ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL 29.300 51.480 1.5 7.5 2.0 5.OOO 9.090 O.OOO
0 .290
ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN HWY 30.330 53.290 1.5 7.5 2.0 5.OOO 9.400 O.OOO
0.300
ELECTR]C PWR L]NEMAN ALL 45.360 51.480 1.5 7.5 2. O 5. OOO 14 . 06 O. OOO
0.450
ELECTR]C PWR LINEMAN HWY 46.950 53.290 1.5 7.5 2.0 5.OOO 14.56 O.OOO
0 . 4-t0
ELECTRIC PWR TRK DRV ALL 30.340 51.480 1.5 7.5 2.0 5.OOO 9.400 O.OOO
0.300
ELECTRIC PWR TRK DRV HWY 31.400 53.290 1.5 7.5 2. O 5. OOO 9.730 O. OOO
0.310
ELECTRTCTAN BLD 38 .160 41. 980 1.5 7.5 2. O 9. 550 18 .29 4.680
0.680
APPENDIX 1
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR BLD 50.800 51.150 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.5'7 14.21 4.060
0.600
FENCE ERECTOR NE ALL 37.340 39.340 1.5 7.5 2.0 13.05 12.06 0.000
0.300
FENCE ERECTOR W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000
0.700
GLAZTER BLD 40.500 42.A0A 1.5 2.0 2. 0 13.14 t6.99 0.000
0.940
HTIFROST TNSULATOR BLD 48.450 50. 950 1.5 7.5 2. 0 11 .41 72. 16 0.000
0 .'7 20
rRoN woRKER E ALL 44.200 46.200 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.65 27.14 0.000n ?qn
rRoN woRKER W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000
0.700
LABORER ALL 39.200 39.950 1.5 ),.5 2.0 13.98 10.12 0.000
0. s00
LATHER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 7.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000
0.630
MACHTNTST BLD 45.350 47. 850 1.5 7.5 2.0 7. 260 8. 950 1.850
0.000
MARBLE FTNTSHERS ALL 31.400 32.9'10 7.5 7.5 2.0 9.850 13.10 0.000
0. 500
MARBLE MASON BLD 43.030 47 .330 1.5 1.5 2.0 10. 05 14.10 0.000
0.780
MATERTAL TESTER r ALL 29.204 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.98 70.12 0.000
0.500
MATERTALS TESTER rr ALL 34.200 0.000 1.5 7.5 2.0 13.98 10.12 0.000
0.500
MTLLWRTGHT ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 7.5 2.0 13.29 1,6.39 0.000
0.630
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 1 48.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17 -55 72.65 1.900
t .250
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 2 46.800 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
L .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 3 44.250 52.100 2.0 2 -0 2.0 17 .55 1,2. 65 1.900
1 atra
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 4 42.500 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 11.55 72.65 1.900
7.250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 5 51.850 52.700 2.0 2.4 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
1.250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 6 49.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
7 .250
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER BLD 7 51.100 52.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 r'1.55 72.65 1.900
7 .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER FLT 36.000 36.000 1.5 7.s 2. 0 17.10 11.80 1. 900
1 atrn
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWY 1 46.300 50.300 1.5 7.5 2.0 17.55 L2.65 1.900
1.250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 2 45.750 50.300 1.5 1,.5 2. 0 17 .55 1,2. 55 1. 900
1, .250
oPERATING ENGTNEER HWy 3 43.700 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17 .55 12.65 1.900
7 .254
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 4 42.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17 .55 12. 65 1. 900
7 .250
oPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWY 5 41.100 50.300 1.5 7.5 2.0 17.55 L2.65 1.900
t .250
APPENDIX 1
OPERATING ENGTNEER HWy 6 49.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
1.250
OPERATTNG ENGTNEER HWy 7 47.300 50.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
I atrn
ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER E ALL 45.000 41 .500 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.55 7'7.94 0.000
0.650
oRNAMNTL IRON WORKER W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000n ?nn
PATNTER ALL 41.130 43.730 1.5 1.5 1.5 10.30 8.200 0.000't ?(n
PATNTER SIGNS BLD 33.920 38.090 1.5 1.5 1 -5 2.600 2.710 0.000
0.000
PTLEDRTVER ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.29 16.39 0.000
0. 630prpEFrrrER BLD 46.000 49.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.000 15.85 0.000
1.780
PLASTERER BLD 47.250 43.760 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.700 13.08 0.000
0.980
PLUMBER BLD 46.650 48.650 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.18 11.46 0.000
0.880
ROOFER BLD 41.000 44 .000 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.280 10.54 0.000
0.530
SHEETMETAL WORKER BLD 44.12A 46.'720 1.5 7.5 2.0 10.65 13.31 0.000
0.820
SPRTNKLER FrrrER BLD 49.200 51.200 1.5 )..5 2.0 11 .15 9.650 0.000
0.550
srEEL ERECTOR E ALL 42.010 44.010 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.45 19.59 0.000
0.350
srEEL ERECTOR W ALL 45.060 48.660 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.52 20.76 0.000
0.700
sroNE MASON BLD 43.780 48.160 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 14.43 0.000
1.030
SURVEY WERKER -> NOT IN EFFECT ALL 37.OOO 37.750 1.5 1.5 2.0
:-2.9'7 9.930 0.000 0.500
TERRAZZO FTNTSHER BLD 38.040 0. 000 1.5 7.5 2. 0 10.55 11 .22 4.004
0.'720
TERRAZZO MASON BLD 41.880 44.880 1.5 7.5 2.0 10.55 l.2.51 0.000
0.940
TILE MASON BLD 42.840 46.840 1.5 L.5 2.0 10.55 10.42 0.000
n qrn
TRAFFTC SAFETY WRKR HWY 32.150 34.350 1.5 1..5 2.0 6.550 6.450 0.000
0.500
TRUCK DRTVER ALL 1 35.920 36.120 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.280 8.760 0.000
0.150
TRUCK DRTVER I\LL 2 32.100 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000
0. 150
TRUCK DRTVER ALL 3 32.900 33. 100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4 .350 0.000
0.150
TRUCK DRTVER ALL 4 33.100 33.100 1.5 L.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000
0.150
TUCKPOTNTER BLD 42.62A 43.620 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.05 13.34 0.000
0.670
Legend: RG (Regiion)
TYP (Trade Ttrpe - AlI,Highway,Buitding,Eloating,oil e chip,Rivers)
C (CIass)
Base (Base wage Rate)
ERMAN (Foreman Rate)
APPENDIX 1
M-F>8 (oT reguired for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri.
oSA (overtime (OT) is required for every hour worked on Saturday)
OSH (Overtime is reguired for every hour worked on Sunday and Hofidays)
H/W (Heafth & Weffare Insurance)
Pensn (Pension)
Vac (Vacation)
Trng (Training)
Explanations
DUPAGE COUNTY
IRON WORKERS AND FENCE ERECTOR (WEST) - WESI Of ROUTC 53.
The following 1i-st is consldered as those days for which holiday rates
of wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day,
Eourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgi-ving Day, Chrj-stmas Day and
Veterans Day in some classiflcations/counties. Generally, any of
these holidays which fal-f on a Sunday is cefebrated on the folJ-owing
Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the
appropriate overtime rate for holiday pay. Common practice ln a given
l-ocaf may alter certain days of cefebration. If in doubt, please
check with IDOL.
EXPLANATION OF CLASSES
ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos materiaf/mol-d and hazardous
material-s from any place in a building, including mechanical systems
where those mechan.ical systems are to be removed. This incl-udes the
removal of asbestos materi-afs/mol-d and hazardous materials from
ductwork or pipes in a buil-ding when the bui-Iding is to be demolishedat the time or at some cfose future date.
ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removaf of asbestos material- from mechanical-
systems/ such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanj-caf
systems are to remain.
TRAFFIC SAFETY - work associated with barrj-cades, horses and drums
used to reduce lane usage on highway work, the instal-fation and
removal- of temporary l-ane markings, and the j-nstalfation and removaf
of temporary road signs.
CERAM]C T]LE FIN]SHER
The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of afl- cl-asses of tiIe, whether
for lnterior or exterior purposes, al-l burned, glazed or unglazedproducts; all- compositron materi-als, granite til-es, warning detectable
tiles/ cement tifes/ epoxy composite materiafsr pdv€rsr glass,
mosaics, flberglass, and all substitute materials, for tile made j-n
tile-like units; al1 mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and
other materia.l-s that are for and intended for use as a finished fl-oor
surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, wa1ks, wa11s, ceilings,
swi-mming pools, and afl- other places where tile is to form a finishedj-nterior or exterior. The mrxing of all setting mortars including but
not l-imited to thj-n-set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any other
sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation/
installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials.
The handfing and unJ-oading of all- sand, cement, 1ime, tiIe,
APPENDIX 1
fixtures, eguipment, adhesi-ves, or any other material-s to be used in
the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of til-e and/or
similar materj-als. Ceramic Til-e Finishers shal-l fifl- all joints and
voids regardJ-ess of method on al-l til-e work, particuJ-arly and
especially after instal-fation of said til-e work. Application of any
and al-l protective coverings to all types of til-e installations
lncludlng, but not be limited to, all soap compounds, paper products,
tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite, cardboard,
and any new type of products that may be used to protect tileinstal-l-ations, Bl-astrac eguipment, and aff fl-oor scarifying equipment
used in preparing floors to receive til-e. The clean up and removal- ofal-l waste and material-s. Af l- demolition of existing tile fl-oors and
wal-l-s to be re-ti-l-ed.
COMMUN]CATIONS TECHNIC]AN
Low vol-tage installation, maintenance and remova] of tel-ecommunicationfacilities (voi-ce, sound, data and video) including telephone anddata inside wire, interconnect, terminal equipment, central offices,
PABX, fiber optic cabl_e and eguipment, mj_cro waves, V-SAT, bypass,
CATV, wAN (wide area networks), LAN (l-ocal- area networks), and rsDN(i-ntegrated system digital network), pulting of wire in raceways, butnot the instal-l-ation of raceways.
MARBLE F]NISHER
Loading and unl-oading trucks, distrj-bution of arf material_s (artstone, sand, etc. ), stocking of floors with material-, performing allrigging for heavy work, the handling of al-l- material- that may beneeded for the install-ation of such materia.l_s, bui_1ding ofscaffoldlng, polishing if needed, patching, waxing of materiar if
damaged, pointing up, caulking, groutlng and cl_eaning of marble,holding water on d.j-amond or carborundum bl-ade or saw for setterscutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation ofmaterj-a], drilring of holes for wj-res that anchor material set bysetters, mixi-ng up of molding plaster for install-ati-on of material,mix:-ng up thin set for the instaffation of material, mi_xing up of sandto cement for the instal-l-ation of material- and such other work as maybe required in helping a Marb.re setter in the handling of al-l-material in the erection or instal-l-ation of interlor marbl-e, slate,travertine, art marbJ-e, serpentine, arberene stone, bJ-ue stone,granite and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreign or domesticmaterial-s as are specified and used in buifding interiors andexteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara,sanionyx, vitrol-ite and simi]ar opaque glass and the laylng of atImarble ti1e, terrazzo ti-l-e, sl-ate til-e and precast tile, steps, riserstreads, base, or any other materiafs that may be used as substitutesfor any of the aforementioned materia.l-s and which are used on interiorand exterior whlch are instal.l_ed 1n a simi-l_ar manner.
MATERTAL TESTER 1: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materi_a1s;field inspectj-on of uncured concrete and asphalt.
MATERTAL TESTER 1r: Fiel-d inspectlon of werds, structural_ steel-,fireproofi-ng, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing stee1, formwork,cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants; ad;ustingproportions of bituminous mixtures.
APPENDIX 1
OPERATING ENGINEER - BUILD]NG
Cl-ass 1. Asphalt Pfant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde,' Backhoes wj-th
Caisson Attachmenti Batch Pl-anti Benoto (requires Two Engj-neers);
Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central- Redi-Mix Pl-ant;
Combination Back Hoe Front End-loader Machine; Compressor and Throttl-e
Val-ve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted) i Concrete Conveyor; Concrete
Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete
Paver 2lE cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer,'Concrete Placing Boom;
Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted) ,' Concrete Tower; Cranes, A11,' Cranes,
Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCI and sj-mil-ar Type); Creter Crane; Spider
Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, A11; Derricks, Traveling,'
Forml-ess Curb and Gutter Machine,' Grader, Elevating; Grouting
Machines; Heavy Duty Self-Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover,'
Highlift Shovel-s or Front Endloader 2-7/4 yd. and over; Hoists,
E.l-evators, outside type rack and pj-nion and simil-ar machines; Hoists,
One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic
Backhoes; Hydraufic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and simil-ar equipment);
Locomotives, Al-f; Motor Patrol-; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators;
PlIe Dri-vers and Skid Rig; Post Hol-e Dlgger; Pre-Stress Machine,' Pump
Cretes Dual- Ram; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum
Bul-ker and Pump; Raised and Bl-ind Hol-e Dril-l-; Roto Mil-l Grinder;
Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip-Form Paver; Stradd1e Buggies; Operation
of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom;
Trenching Machines.
Class 2. Boilersi Broom, Al-l- Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete
Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forkl-ift Trucks;
Highlift Shovels or Front Endl-oaders under 2-l/4 yd.; Hoists,
Automatic,' Hoists, lnside El-evators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machj-ne,'
Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Sel-f-Propel-led);
Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Ro1lers, A11; Steam Generators; Tractors,
A11; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Rol-fer; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame.
Class 3. Ai-r Compressor; Combinati-on Smal-l- Eguipment Operator,'
Generators,' Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, Inside El-evators (remodeling
or renovation work); Hydraulj-c Power Units (Pil-e Driving, Extracting,
and Drlll-ing); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300
ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, Wefl- Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5);
Winches, 4 Smal1 Efectric Dril-l- Wi-nches.
Cl-ass 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Oil-ers; and Brick
Forkl-ift.
Cl-ass 5. Assistant Craft Eoreman.
Cl-ass 6. Gradal-1 .
CIass 7. Mechanics; Welders.
OPERATING ENG]NEERS - H]GHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Asphalt Plant,' Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination,' Asphalt
Heater Scarflre; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other simil-ar
type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Ballast
APPENDIX 1
Regulator; Beft Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central- Redi-Mix
Pl-ant; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe
Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck
Mounted); Concrete Conveyor,' Concrete Paver over 27E cu. fL.; Concrete
Pl-acer; Concrete Tube Fl-oat,'Cranes, al-l- attachments; Cranes, Tower
Cranes of afl types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane,. Crusher, Stone, etc.;
Derricks, Al-l-; Derrick Boats; Derrj-cks, Traveling; Dredges;
Elevators, Outside type Rack & Pinion and Similar Machines; Eormfess
Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader,
Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form Grader, PulI Grader, Subgrader,. Guard
Rail- Post Driver Truck Mounted,' Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy
Duty Self-Propelled Transporter or Prj-me Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes;
Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40' of boom reach,'Lubrication
Technician; Manipul-ators,' Mucking Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig;
Pre-Stress Machine,' Pump Cretes Duaf Ram; Rock Drill - Crawl-er or Skid
Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted,' Rock,/Track Tamper; Roto Mil-l-
Grinder,' Slip-Form Paver; Snow Mel-ters; Soil Test Drrl1 Rig (Truck
Mounted) ,' Straddf e Buggies; Hydraulic Tel-escoping Form (Tunnel-);
Operati-on of Tieback Machine,' Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor
Drawn Bel-t Loader (with attached pusher - two englneers); Tractor with
Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machinei
Trenchj-ng,' Truck Mounted Concrete Pump wi-th Boom; Raised or Bl-ind Hol-e
Dril-l-s (Tunnel- Shaft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5
ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc; Underground Boring and,/or Mining
Machines under 5 ft. in diameteri Wheel- Excavator; Widener (APSCO).
Class 2. Batch Pfant; Bitumi-nous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Val-ve;
Bul-ldozers; Car Loader Trail-i-ng Conveyors; Combinati-on Backhoe Front
Endloader Machine (Less than l- cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with
attachments); Compressor and Throttle Val-ve; Compressor, Common
Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grind-ing
Machine,' Concrete Mixer or Paver 7S Series to and including 2'7 cu.
ft.; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine,
Beltinq Machine and Seafing Machj-ne,' Concrete Wheel- Saw; Conveyor Muck
Cars (Haglund or Slmi-l-ar Type); Dri11s, All; Finishing Machine -
Concrete; Highlift Shovefs or Front Endfoader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging
Machine,' Hydraulic Boom Trucks (A11 Attachments); Hydro-Blaster; Hydro
Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; Al-l- Locomotives,
DJ-nky; Off-Road Hauling Units (including articulating) Non
Sel-f-Loading Ejectj-on Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type
Pumps, Gypsum Bul-ker and Pump; Ro11er, Asphalt; Rotary Snow Pfows;
Rototiffer, Seaman, etc., self-propefled; Self-Propel-1ed Compactor;
Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.,' Scraper - Single/Twin Engrne/Push and
Pull-; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors
pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot, Disc, Compactor, etc.,' Tug Boats.
Cl-ass 3. Boj-l-ers; Brooms, Al-l Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender;
Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over);
Conveyor, Portabfe; Farm-Type Tractors Used for Mowi-ng, Seedi-ng, etc.;
Forkfift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All-
El-evators; Hoi-sts, Tugger Single Drum,' Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe
Jacking Machines; Post-Hole Dj-gger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Drj-ven;
Pug Mil1s; Roflers, other than Asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower; Steam
Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame; Work Boats;
Tamper-Form-Motor Driven.
Class 4. Air Compressor,' Combrnation - Smal-l Equ:-pment Operator,'
APPENDIX 1
Directional Boring Machinei Generators; Heaters, Mechanj-caL; Hydraulic
Power Unit (Pife Driving, Extractj-ng, or Drilling); Light Plants, Al-l-
(1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300
ft.); Pumps, Well- Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding
Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Smalf El-ectric Dril-l- Winches.
Cl-ass 5. SkidSteer Loader (al-l-) ; Brick Forkl-ifts; Oil-ers.
Cl-ass 6. Field Mechanics and Fiefd Wel-ders
Class 7. Dowel-l- Machine with Air Compressor; Gradal-l- and machines of
l-ike nature.
OPERATING ENGINEER - FLOATING
Diver. Di-ver Wet Tender, Diver Tender, ROV Pilot, ROV Tender
SURVEY WORKER - Operated survey equipment including data col-l-ectors,
G.P.S. and robotic instruments, as well as conventional- l-evel-s and
translts.
TRUCK DRIVER - BUILDING, HEAVY AND HlGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Two or three Ax]e Trucks. A-frame Truck when used for
transportation purposes,' Air Compressors and Weldrng Machines,
including those pulled by cars, pi-ck-up trucks and tractors;
Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck
Washers; Carry-a11s; Fork Lifts and Holsters; Helpers; Mechanics
Helpers and Greasers; Oil- Distributors 2-man operation; Pavement
Breakers; Pofe Trailer, up to 4O feet; Power Mower Tractors;
Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2-man
operation; Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters,'
Unskil-l-ed Dumpman,' and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights,
barricades, and portable toifets on the job site.
Class 2. Four axl-e trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards;
Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Eucfids, Hug Bottom Dump TurnapuJ-ls or
Turnatraifers when pulling other than self-loading equipment or
similar equj-pment under 16 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yeards,'
Ready-mix Pfant Hopper Operator, and Winch Trucks, 2 Ax1es.
Class 3. Five axl-e trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over;
Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Eucl-ids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatraj-l-ers or
turnapulls when pulling other than self-loading equipment or similar
equlpment over 16 cubic yards; Exploslves and/or Fission Materiaf
Trucks; Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobife Cranes whi1e in transit,'
Oi1 Distributors, 1-man operation; Pol-e Trailer, over 40 feet; Pol,e
and Expandable Trail-ers hauling material- over 50 feet long; Slurry
trucks, 1-man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more;
Mechani-c--Truck Wefder and Truck Painter.
Class 4. Six axle trucks,' Dual-purpose vehicl-es, such as mounted
crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic,'
Sel-f-loading equipment fike P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front.
APPENDIX 1
TERRAZZO EINISHER
The handfing of sand, cement, marbJ-e chips, and al-f other material-s
that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing,
grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all- Marble, Mosaic, and
Terrazzo work, floors, base, staj-rs, and wainscoting by hand or
machj-ne, and in addition, asslsting and aidj-ng Marble, Masonic, and
Terrazzo Mechanics.
Other Cl-assifications of Work:
For definitions of cfassifications not otherwise set out, the
Department generalJ-y has on file such definitions which are avaifabfe.
If a task to be performed is not subject to one of the
classifications of pay set out, the Department wilf upon being
contacted state which neighboring county has such a classification and
provide such rate, such rate bei-ng deemed to exist by reference in
this document. If no neighbori-ng county rate applies to the task,
the Department shal-l- undertake a special determination, such special
determinatlon bei-ng then deemed to have existed under this
determinatj-on. If a project requj-res these, or any classification not
l-isted, please contact IDOL at 2I1-182-1710 for wage rates or
clarifications.
LANDSCAPING
Landscaping work fal-l-s under the existj-ng classifications for laborer,
operating engineer and truck dri-ver. The work performed by landscape
plantsman and landscape l-aborer is covered by the existing
cl-assification of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators(regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by the
classifications of operating engineer. The work performed by
landscape truck drivers (regardless of sj-ze of truck driven) is
covered by the cl-assifications of truck driver.
MATERIAL TESTER & MATER]AL TESTER/INSPECTOR I AND ]I
Notwithstanding the difference in the cl-assification titl_e, the
c"l-assi-f icatlon ent j-tl-ed "Material Tester I " involves the same j ob
duties as the cfassificatj-on entit1ed "Material- Tester/lnspector I".
Likewise, the cl-assification enti-tl-ed "Materj-al- Tester If" involves
the same job duties as the cl-assification entitl-ed "Materia.I
APPENDIX 2
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
[insert contractor name and address here:]
as Principal (hereinafter called the "Contractor") and
[insert surety name and address here:]
, organized and existing under the laws of the State of
(hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), in
the full and just sum of finsert fulI contract price here:] $for the
payment of which sum of money well and truly to be made. the Contractor and the Surety bind
themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents, said amount to include payment of actual costs and damages and for
attorneys' fees, architectural fees, design fees, engineering fees, accounting fees, testing fees,
consulting fees, administrative costs, court costs, interest and any other fees and expenses resulting
from or incurred by reason of the Contractor's failure to promptly and faithfully perform its contract
with the Owner, said confact being more fully described below, and to include attorneys' fees, court
costs and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing
performance of the obligation of the Surety under this bond.
WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract date
here:] , 201-, with the Owner titled finsert contract title here:]
.' (the
"Contract"), the terms and conditions of which are by this reference incorporated herein as though
fully set forth herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if the
Contractor shall well, truly, and promptly perform all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions,
and agreements of the Contractor under the contract, including but not limited to the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract, (1) to provide, perform, and complete at the Work Site and in the
manner specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services, transportation, equipment,
materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and
other means and items necessary for finsert general description of the Work here:]
, (2) to procure
and furnish all permits, Iicenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in
connection therewith [except as otherwise expressly provided in the Attachment _ of the
ContractJ; (3) to procure and furnish all bonds, certificates, and policies of insurance specified in the
Contract; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of
the Contractor by the Contract; and (6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a
proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as required by and pursuant to, the
Contract; all of which is herein referred to as the "Work," whether or not any of the Work enter into
and become component parts of the improvement contemplated. then this obligation shall be null and
void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
APPENDIX 2
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications,
alterations, omissions, deletions, additions. extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the
Owner or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of said Contract; in or to the schedules, plans,
drawings, or specifications; in or to the method or manner of performance of the Work; in or to
Owner-furnished facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of
payment therefore shall in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or
any of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, or afFect the obligations of the
Surety on this bond, all notice of any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations,
omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults
by the Contractor or of the Owner's termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the foregoing paragraph, in no event shall the
obligations of the Surety under this bond in the event of the Contractor's default be greater than the
obligations of the Contractor under the Contract in the absence of the Contractor default.
In the event of a default or defaults by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to take
over and complete the Contract on 30 calendar days' written notice to the Surety, in which event the
Surety shall pay the Owner all costs incurred by the Owner in taking over and completing the
Contract.
At its option, the Owner may instead request that the Surety take over and complete the
Contract, in which event the Surety shall take reasonable steps to proceed promptly with completion
no later than 30 calendar days after the date on which the Owner notifies the Surety that the Owner
wants the Surety to take over and complete the Contract.
The Owner shall have no obligation to actually incur any expense or correct any deficient
performance of the Contractor to be entitled to receive the proceeds of this bond.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other
than the Owner or the heirs, executors, administrators, or successors of the Owner.
Signed and sealed this
Attest/Witness:
day of 201
PRINCIPAL
By:
Title:
By:
Title:
AttesVWitness:SURETY
By:
Bv:
By:
APPENDIX 3
LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
[insert contractor name and address here:]
as Principal (hereinafter called the "Contractor") and
[insert surety name and address here:]
, organized and existing under the laws of the State of
(hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), for
the use and benefit of itself and of claimants as hereinafter defined (the "Claimants") in the full and
just sum of [insert full contract price here:] $to be paid to the Owner or
the Claimants or the Owner's or the Claimant's assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made
the Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors,
and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, said amount to include attorney's fees,
court costs, and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully
enforcing performance of the obligation of the Surefy under this bond.
WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated finsert contract date
here:]207-, with the Owner titled [insert contract title here:]
" (the "Contract"),
the terms and conditions of which are by this reference incorporated herein as though fully set forth
herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH T}IAT if the
Contractor shall promptly pay or cause to be paid all sums of money that may be due to any Claimant
with respect to the Contractor's obligations under the Contract: (1) to provide, perform, and complete
at the Work Site and in the manner specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services,
transpoftation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste
disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for [insert general description of the
Work here:]
; (2) to procure and furnish all permits.
licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith
[except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the ContractJ; (3) to procure and furnish
all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Contract; (4) to pay all
applicable federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of the Contractor by the
Contract; and (6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike
manner and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is
herein referred to as the "Work," whether or not any of said Work enter into and become component
parts of the improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall
remain in full force and effect.
For purpose of this bond, a Claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the
Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to provide, perform, or complete any part of the
Work.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly and severally agree that every Claimant that has
not had all just claims for the furnishing of any part of the Work paid in full, including without
limitation all claims for amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, rentals of or service or
repairs on machinery, equipment, and tools consumed or used in connection with the furnishing of any
APPENDIX 3
part of the Work, may sue on this bond for the use of that Claimant, may prosecute the suit to final
judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due that Claimant, and may have execution therein;
provided, however, that the Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any
such suit. The provisions of 30 ILCS 550/1 and 2 of the Illinois Compiled Statutes shall be deemed
inserted herein, including the time limits within which notices of claim must be filed and actions
brought under this bond.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly agree that the Owner may sue on this bond if the
Owner is held liable to, or voluntarily agrees to pay, any Claimant directly, but nothing in this bond
shall create any duty on the part of the Owner to pay any Claimant.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications,
alterations, omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the
Owner or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of the Contract; in or to the schedules, plans,
drawings, or specifications; in or to the method or manner of performance of the Work; in or to
Owner-furnished facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of
payment therefor shall in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or
any of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the
Surety on this bond, all notice of any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations,
omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults
by the Contractor or of the Owner's termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Signed and sealed this
AttesVWitness:
day of 201
CONTRACTOR
By:
Title:
By:
Title:
By:
By:
Attest/Witness:SURETY
By:
By:
#34920193_v2